BP 8244 tel +33 1 34 20 70 00 95801 Cergy Pontoise Cedex fax +33 1 34 20 70 47 FRANCE http://www.nextream-online.com DBE 4110 DSNG ENCODER (Release 7.0) MPEG-2/DVB Encoder USER MANUAL 47232437AK This document and any updates and/or supplemental information, including any copies thereof, cannot be reproduced, neither communicated to a third party, without written authorisation from NEXTREAM. 2003 NEXTREAM All rights reserved BLANK PAGE GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS iii
47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Please review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it. CAUTION: These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Operating Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Important Safety Precautions Use Proper Power Cord Power cords are no longer shipped with the device. You are recommended to use the cord described on page 55. Avoid Electric Overload Do not apply a mains voltage that is outside the range specified in this manual. Ground the Product This product is grounded through the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the ground pin must be correctly connected to the ground. Before switching the device on, ensure that it is properly grounded. Do Not Operate Without Covers To avoid electric shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with cover panels or plates removed. Use Proper Fuse For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse specified by NEXTREAM. Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions To avoid electric shock, do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions. iv GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmosphere To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere. Maintenance To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power supply before carrying out any maintenance operations on the device. Maintenance should be carried out by qualified personnel. Product Damage Precautions Use Proper Power Source Do not operate this product from a power source that applies more than the voltage specified. Fitting If installing the device in a rack, observe the installation instructions in the section Rack installation page 53. Do not just secure the front panel of the device in the rack, instead use L- profiles as specified in the above-mentioned section. Dusty atmosphere As the device features no air filter, it must be installed in a rack fitted with a filter if used in a dusty environment. This filter should be cleaned on a regular basis to avoid any overheating. Provide Proper Ventilation Provide proper ventilation to prevent product overheating. Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel. Replacing components Only use components from or approved by NEXTREAM. GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS v
47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Replacement of RAM with in-built lithium battery This product includes a non volatile RAM with an in-built lithium battery which should never require replacing. If for any reason replacement does prove necessary, please observe the following conditions: . The operation must only be performed by qualified personnel. . Only replace with the same or equivalent memory type. CAUTION! Danger of explosion if memory is incorrectly replaced. . Ensure the memory is inserted the right way round. . Please dispose of dead memories according to the manufacturers instructions. Retain Original Packaging If equipment is returned to the Customer Service Department, the faulty device must be packed where possible in its original packaging (protective corners and boxes). If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected against shocks during transportation. Our Customer Service Department examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally noted. Transportation costs and risks for equipment returns are borne by the Customer. Equipment should only be returned with a return authorisation form (provided at the end of this manual). vi GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual USING THE MANUAL vii USING THE MANUAL Chapter 1 "Specifications" provides technical specifications and detailed characteristics of the DBE 4110 DSNG Encoder. Chapter 2 "Installation" explains the operations necessary on initial start up: equipment installation, connection, switching on, installation of "Stand-alone" supervision software for operation from a dedicated PC and installation of boards. Chapter 3 "Front Panel Operation" presents the local supervision and configuration mode which gives the DSNG operator full control of signal transmission and compression parameters. Chapter 4 "PC operation - Control & Command software" gives a description of the "Stand-alone" software. Chapter 5 "PC operation - Fast_DSNG software" gives a description of the "Fast_DSNG" software especially designed for DSNG operators. Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting" gives useful basic maintenance information which will assist with connection problems and mains fuse inspection. Chapter 7 "Customer Service" contains important contact information should you require the services of the NEXTREAM Customer Service. Chapter 8 "Abbreviations and Acroynms" contains a list of the principal abbreviations and acronyms used in the manual along with their wording in full. viii USING THE MANUAL THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE CONTENTS ix
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics ............................................................. 39 1.4.5 - Environmental specifications.......................................................... 42 1.4.6 - Equipment view.............................................................................. 45 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 3 1.1 - Encoding system overview 1.1 - ENCODING SYSTEM OVERVIEW The DBE 4110 DSNG encoder has been designed to meet the main operational Digital SNG requirements: robustness, reduced size (2RU) and weight, easy to use and to set up, high quality video and audio, low delay and ultra low delay modes for live interviews. Figure 1.1: DBE 4110 system overview video, audio, data Encoder DBE 4110 TS Modulator C&C 4 Chapter 1 1.2 - DBE 4110 overview THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.2 - DBE 4110 OVERVIEW The DBE 4110 is a compact MPEG-2-standard encoding (or compression) device offering both MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML standard. The use of the 4:2:2 Profile allows compression rates of up to 50Mbit/s without prior sub-sampling and ensures a high quality compression. Performance and cost-effectiveness are achieved through the THOMSON second generation chipset which offers five-level hierarchical motion estimation, far-ranging motion vector calculations and two-pass rate control for improved bit-rate allocation. The DBE 4110 single-service encoder performs encoding from a composite source or SDI with or without embedded audio. A maximum of 6 separate audio inputs are available. The DBE 4110 ensures interoperability with DVB-standard equipment. A fully DVB-compliant transport stream composed of video, audios, data as well as SI/PSI information is delivered directly in DVB-ASI format. Furthermore the DBE 4110 is fully compliant with the scrambling features defined by EBU (namely mode 1), for exchanging scrambled MPEG-2 streams. The DBE 4110 can be controlled through its front panel to facilitate basic operation. The DBE 4110 is provided with two Control&Command software programs, running on Windows NT TM based PC station using an Ethernet 10 baseT interface: Fast_DSNG software for easy and intuitive operation, specially designed for DSNG operators, Stand-Alone Control&Command software for advanced operation. This document refers to release 7.0 of the DBE 4110. Figure 1.2 gives an overview of the DBE 4110. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 5 1.2 - DBE 4110 overview Figure 1.2: DBE 4110 overall block diagram Scrambler MUX 4 x MPEG-1 Audio Encoders Data Interface MPEG-2 Video Encoder SDI Video Audio Interface PAL/ SECAM/ 4:2:2 // ASI Interface 2 x MPEG-1 Encoders VBI Processor TS IN ASI SDI IN TS Composite Video Interface 2 stereo anal. audios ADC ASI Interface Basic Hardware or Software option Alarms LCD Control/Command NTSC RS 232 Audio ATADI 2 AES/EBU SDI and AES/EBU DPSN board
board AMuSE board MSDL board Alarm relay Alarms Modulated output ISMB board PAL/ NTSC 4:2:2 // COMPIN board 6 Chapter 1 1.3 - Sales references THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.3 - SALES REFERENCES DBE 4110 DSNG encoder (with deactivated DVB-CS scrambler: N4110220AK, or without scrambling capability: N4110220BK), including: Basic audio/video encoder, COMPIN board, Low Delay Mode, VBI Processing, 100 to 230 VAC power supply, Software options: ASI TS input (N41STS1NAK), DVB Common Scr. (N41SDVCFAK), MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (N41S422PAK), RS 232 (N41SD56KAK), Ext. Modulator C&C (N41SM0DCAK). Important: All software options are purchased for, and attributed to, a given DBE 4110 unit and may not apply to several units. Each software option is attributed a licence number which is requested prior to use. Hardware options: 4 stereo audios (N41HAMUBAK): AMuSE board, 2 AES/EBU interfaces (N41HATADAK): ATADI board, Alarm Relay Closure (N41HMSDLAK): RSMAINT and MSDL boards, DPSN board (N41HDPSNAK), Int. Modulator (N41HM0DUAK): ISMB board, XLR adapter cord (N41HAXLRAK). 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 7 1.3 - Sales references Board connections Figure 1.3: DBE 4110 rear panel COMPIN (basic) or DPSN (option) SSEB (basic) AMuSE (option) or ISMB (option) ATADI (option) MSDL (option) 8 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.4 - SPECIFICATIONS 1.4.1 - Description of basic functions 1.4.1.1 - Video audio interface (SDI) The SMPTE 259M standard SDI input uses a female 75 BNC connector. It accepts a 270Mbit/s component 625 or 525 line serial stream. It operates with a 0- 200m length cable (type RG11A/V Filotex or 8281 Belden). 1.4.1.2 - De-embedded audio inputs Audio de-embedding is SMPTE 272MA-compliant. Audio de-embedding is possible when: the video encoder uses the SDI input, the video encoder is not used and there is a signal at the SDI input, and is not possible when the video encoder uses the composite video input. The 270Mbit/s signal can contain up to 8 stereo audios. The DBE 4110 can de- embed 2 stereo audios which are either: stereos 1 and 2 (DID = 2FF), or stereos 3 and 4 (DID = 1FD), or stereos 5 and 6 (DID = 1FB), or stereos 7 and 8 (DID = 2F9). Characteristics: synchronous 48kHz 20 bits audio, de-embedding of 2 stereo audio channels, C, U and V bits are ignored, no pre-emphasis or de-emphasis. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 9 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.1.3 - Analogue audio inputs with 2 stereo audio 1.4.1.4 - TS output The SSEB board delivers three identical ASI standard TS outputs on a female 75 BNC connector. The ASI output runs at a constant 270Mbit/s. The TS data rate is CHARACTERISTICS Input impedance set to 600 for all measurements. Input level adjustment set to 24dBu for all measurements. All measurements are performed with MPEG-1 compression, layer 2, 256kbit/s stereo bitrate. Input type Balanced Input impedance 600 +/ 5% or high impedance (typ. 18k) Input level adjustment 0dBFS = +8 to +24dBu (in steps of 1dB) Common mode rejection ratio > 60dB from 20Hz to 20kHz Bandwidth (measured with a sinus sweep) 20Hz to 20kHz, (+/- 0.3dB) Vin = 23.5dBu Insertion gain +/- 0.3dB Vin = 23.5dBu, 1kHz Total harmonic distortion + noise <0.01% (ADC only) at 1kHz <0.1% (ADC + MPEG-1 compression) RMS measurement, from 20Hz to 20kHz Vin = 23.5dBu Signal to noise ratio 85dB Vin = 23.5dBu at 1kHz RMS measurement, from 20Hz to 20kHz, unweighted Crosstalk between any two mono chan- nels 80dB V(in) = 23.5dBu, 1kHz ADC resolution / sampling frequency 18 bits / 48kHz Emphasis no pre-emphasis or de-emphasis 10 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 supplemented with stuffing bytes to reach 270Mbit/s. Data burst mode is implemented (individual bytes spread out in time). The minimum TS data rate is 1Mbit/s and the maximum TS data rate is 54Mbit/s. TS packet length is 188 or 204 bytes. In 204-byte mode, the last 16 bytes are set to the value zero and are meant to be replaced by an error correction code (Reed Solomon) in a downstream modulator. 1.4.1.5 - Control and command interface The DBE 4110 encoder can be operated either locally (front panel control) or by remote control (using Control&Command software running on Windows NT based PC station) using an Ethernet 10 baseT interface. Two Control&Command software programs are provided: Fast_DSNG software for easy and intuitive operation, specially designed for DSNG operators. Its main window is shown in the figure below, Stand-Alone Control&Command software for advanced operation. Attention : Some functions are not controlled by all the interfaces. CHARACTERISTICS Standard CENELEC: EN50083-9 Mode Data burst Signal amplitude 800mV 10% Rise / fall time 1.2ns Random jitter (using D21.5 signal) 4% CHARACTERISTICS Standard IEEE 802.3 - 10 Base T Connector type RJ45 connector Protocol TCP - IP based protocol 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 11 1.4 - Specifications The recommended configuration of the PC supporting the stand-alone software is as follows: 300 MHz Pentium II microprocessor, 64Mb RAM, 1.2Gb Hard drive, WINDOWS NT version 4 or WINDOWS 2000 software, ETHERNET board (e.g. Compaq Integrated Netelligent 10/100 TX PQ Network Adapter), TCP/IP command interface (Microsoft TCP/IP-32), Screen 17 ", resolution SVGA (800x600), colour, Mouse. The DBS 2930 Stand-Alone software provided can only control one encoder. To control a complete broadcast system, please refer to the DBS 2930 datasheet for details. 12 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.4.1.6 - MPEG-2 4:2:0MP@ML Video encoding complies with MPEG-2 standard ISO/IEC 13818-2. CHARACTERISTICS Video source 50/60Hz frequency a Interlaced /progressive 4:2:2 video 10 bits Encoding format 2:1 vertical filtering (chrominance) 720, 704, 544, 480, 352 pixels 576 lines (50Hz) or 480 lines (60Hz) SIF mode (352 pixels, 288 lines (50 Hz) or 240 lines (60Hz)) GOP parameters 1 M 3 M N 24 Possibility of closed GOP Frame picture with adaptive field/frame encoding modes (motion estimation and DCT) Seamless M and N parameter changing Aspect ratio Manual 4/3, 16/9, Automatic from WSS information or AFD information. Motion estimation vector range (frame based) +126/-126 Vertical +254.5/-255 Horizontal Bit rate VBV model implementation Bit rate type: CBR Bit rate parameters: 100kbit/s steps 0.5Mbit/s bit rate 15Mbit/s SIF at 500kbit/s (bitrates between 500Kbit/s and 2Mbit/s are reserved for almost still pictures, depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity) Seamless bit rate change Video buffer management Leak mode Miscellaneous functions Detection of scene cuts, 3/2 pull down, bad edit Capture and transmission of Digital Vertical Time Code (into GOP header). 75% bar pattern insertion 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 13 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.1.7 - Audio encoder The SSEB board features 2 MPEG-1 audio encoders in accordance with ISO/IEC 11172-3, layer 2, 48kHz standard. For each audio encoder, possible rate / mode combinations are listed in the table below: The audio encoding module performs automatic audio/video compensation delay. The audio encoding module has audio pattern generation capability (2.1kHz 0dBFS signal). Input selection between analogue audio, de-embedded audio and AES/EBU audio (N41HATADAK option) is separate for the 2 MPEG-1 audio encoders. Selection is supervision-controlled. Mono, stereo or dual-channel can be selected either manually, or automatically from VPS information when present in the video source. All command running is seamless apart from audio/video compensation delay modification, analogue input level adjustment and changing between one and two PIDs. Each MPEG-1 dual channel encoder can be configured in such a way that it is conveyed as a single PID or as two distinct PIDs. In this case the audio encoder generates two single channel elementary streams, both having the same Normal delay Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 740ms (50Hz), 617ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 1.5 to 15Mbit/s. a.Throughout the document, the value 60Hz in relation to video signal implies a real value of 59.94Hz Rate (kbit/s) Mode 64 96 128 192 256 384 Single Channel (Mono) X X X X Dual Channel X X X X Stereo X X X X Joint Stereo X X X X CHARACTERISTICS 14 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 configuration except for the PID and the language code (both components will have the same bitrate, etc.). When there is no video component, the MPEG-1 encoder is in radio mode and the delay (from SDI encoder input to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes equal to 150ms (50Hz and 60Hz). 1.4.1.8 - SI/PSI management The DBE 4110 has three operating modes for signalling generation: no signalling generated, generation of ISO tables (PAT, CAT, PMT, TSDT), generation of DVB tables (ISO tables + SDT, TDT, TOT, BAT, NIT). The operating mode is selected by the operator. The DBE 4110 regularly broadcasts signalling information according to repetition rates that can be set up from the Control & Command station (remote control). Tables required for DVB DSNG operation are automatically generated according to transmitted signal configuration. 1.4.1.9 - Low delay mode Two trade offs between delay and video compression quality are now available: Low delay mode 4:2:0MP@ML MPEG-2 video Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 320ms (50Hz), 267ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 4 to 15Mbit/s. I and P pictures, no B picture. 4:2:2P@ML MPEG-2 video Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 280ms (50Hz), 233ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 50Mbit/s. I and P pictures, no B picture. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 15 1.4 - Specifications SIF mode is not available in ultra low delay mode. Use of MSU 4422 decoder adds approximately 70 ms to each delay. Switching between normal and low delay or ultra low delay is not seamless (picture is disturbed for 2 or 3 seconds). Bitrates below 4Mbit/s in low delay / 4:2:0 mode, and bitrates below 6Mbit/s in low delay / 4:2:2 mode and ultra low delay mode are reserved for almost still pictures, depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity. 1.4.1.10 - Private data The possibility of entering private data via Ethernet, as TS packets or sections, is included in the basic version of the DBE 4110 (List of supported protocols in the second table below).
When data is injected as MPEG-2 TS packets, the DBE 4110 may perform PID remapping. The TS packets received are not supposed to contain a PCR or a PTS. When data is injected as DVB sections, the DBE 4110 performs packetisation. Ultra low delay mode 4:2:0MP@ML MPEG-2 video Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 140ms (50Hz), 134ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 15Mbit/s. I pictures, no P and B pictures. 4:2:2P@ML MPEG-2 video Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 100ms (50Hz), 100ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 6 to 50Mbit/s. I pictures, no P and B pictures. CHARACTERISTICS Standard IEEE 802.3 - 10 Base T Connector type RJ45 connector Protocol TCP - IP based protocol 16 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Maximum data rate depends on Ethernet network traffic. When the Ethernet network is not a limiting factor, the guaranteed maximum data rate depends on internal conditions; it is never under 64kbit/s and can go up to 750kbit/s when the following conditions are met: TS input unused, 1 service composed of: - 0 or 1 video component, - and 0 or 1 audio component, - and 0 to 4 ECM components. The maximum permitted data rate parameter is set at 1 Mbit/s. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 17 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.1.11 - Stream Editing In order to obtain an editable MPEG stream between two time code values, the DBE 4110 encoder can insert an I picture and create a closed GOP when the incoming DVITC reaches a predefined value. The DBE 4110 automatically chooses the DVITC if it is on lines 19 and 332 (50Hz) or lines 11 and 274 (60Hz). If the DVITC is on other lines, the user must specify the lines using the DBS 2930 Control&Command software. The predefined value is sent to the DBE 4110 via MTEP / TCP/IP protocol (available on request). This value must be sent in advance with reference to the current time code value. The DBE 4110 can store up to 32 preset values. About this limit the new values are ignored. Notes: - Stream Editing does not operate with the VITC. - Stream Editing does not operate in 60Hz drop frame mode. 7.0 release protocols Title THOMSON proprietary protocol MPEG1 1G/2G Control/Command protocol Messages description VIACCESS proprietary protocol V1.0 Dossier de spcifications fonctionnelles dtailles Diffuseur de Messagerie rf. R/PACMAN/DM/SPE01 TCP DVB simulcrypt ETSI TS 103 197 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt ETSI TS 101 197-1 Technical specification of Simulcrypt in DVB sys- tems (06/97) UDP DVB simulcrypt with TCP control layer ETSI TS 103 197 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt UDP DVB simulcrypt without TCP control layer ETSI TS 103 197 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Head-End Implementation of DVB simulcrypt 18 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 - Stream Editing does not operate with the video in 4:2:2:P. - Stream Editing does not operate in low or ultra low delay mode. The video buffer level is controlled so as to be more constant at each edit point (close to the maximum level). Please contact NEXTREAM for additional information if you are interested in this function. 1.4.1.12 - VBI processing This module is capable of processing ancillary data from either the SDI or the PAL input. The following diagrams describe the different ways ancillary data can or cannot be processed: 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 19 1.4 - Specifications Figure 1.4: Ancillary data processing VBI video video + VBI video + VBI video VBI PAL SDI PAL SDI PAL SDI PAL SDI VBI video + VBI PAL SDI 1 2 3 4 5 Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram 20 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Diagram 1 shows a VBI inserter function. VBI information from the composite video signal is conveyed in the TS bitstream as described in DVB standard. The composite video signal must be externally synchronised with the SDI video source. Diagrams 2 and 3 illustrate a common setup. Diagram 4 shows a configuration similar to diagram 1 but which is not supported. Diagram 5 illustrates the fact that the DBE 4110 cannot simultaneously process VBI information coming from both video inputs. The VBI processor capabilities are described in the following table. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 21 1.4 - Specifications Data Frequency Data standards Input Signal Possible lines (starting from 1) Ceefax B magazine and/or subtitles 50Hz ITU-R.BT653 ETS 300 706 SDI or Composite waveform 6 to 22 320 to 335 Transparent lines 50Hz SDI or Composite 6 to 22 318 to 335 VITC 50Hz IEC 60461 SMPTE 12M SDI or Composite waveform 6 to 22 DVITC 50Hz SMPTE 266M SDI waveform 6 to 22 WSS 50Hz ETS300 294 SDI or Composite waveform 23 WSS 50Hz Proprietary based on SMPTE 291M SDI binary 23 VPS 50Hz ETS 300 231 SDI or Composite waveform 16 AFD 50Hz First part of viideo index SMPTE RP186 SDI 11 and 324 Transparent lines 60Hz SDI or Composite 10 to 21 273 to 284 VITC 60Hz IEC 60461 SMPTE 12M SDI or Composite waveform 10 to 21 DVITC 60Hz SMPTE 266M SDI waveform 10 to 21 Closed caption 60Hz EIA-608 SDI or Composite waveform 21 22 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Data Max treated lines Treatment MPEG standards Notes Ceefax B magazine and/or subtitles 16 per field demodulated then mapped into TS packets ETSI EN 300 472 DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775 a Transparent lines 8 per frame luminance samples, 8 bits, 720 samples/line, mapped into TS packets DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775 b VITC 1 demodulated then mapped into GOP header ISO/IEC 13818-2 DVITC 1 demodulated then mapped into GOP header ISO/IEC 13818-2 WSS 1 demodulated then mapped into TS packets and/or used to inform the video encoder DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775 WSS 1 binary WSS from DBI 2000 (AVA) is mapped into TS packets and/or used to inform the video encoders DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775 c VPS 1 demodulated, then mapped into TS packets and/or used to control the audio encoders DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775 AFD 2 inserted into video stream ARDSPE1 24 april 1998 Transparent lines 8 per frame luminance samples, 8 bits, 720 samples/line, mapped into TS packets DVB A056 ETSI EN 301 775 b VITC 1 demodulated then mapped into GOP header ISO/IEC 13818-2 DVITC 1 demodulated then mapped into GOP header ISO/IEC 13818-2 Closed caption 1 demodulated then mapped into video user data ATSC A/53 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 23 1.4 - Specifications Notes 1. Data cannot be encoded simultaneously according to 50Hz and 60Hz MPEG-2 standard. 2. Each CEEFAX B, VPS, WSS can be mapped into its individual PID (max. 4 PID) or all the previous can be mapped together into the same PID. 3. The same VBI line cannot be associated with different PIDs. 1.4.1.13 - COMPIN board The COMPIN board provides composite video input for the DBE 41xx encoders. The COMPIN board fits in the upper 6U slot. Note: the COMPIN board does not handle SECAM standard. a.Since 6.5 release, CEEFAX extraction from the incoming video signal has been improved. The data positionning window has been widened to +/-1s. Demodulation process benefits from an automatic threshold level adjustment. b.Restrictions of DVB A056 concerning the MSU 4422 decoder. c.Not recommended for new systems. INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Standard PAL BDGHI / NTSC M (ITU-R Rec. 624) Input impedance BNC / 75 Input level (100% white bar) 1 volt peak-to-peak, nominal, with sync signal ENCODER + DECODER CHARACTERISTICS PAL STANDARD (excluding VTR and synchronised modes) WITH MSU 4422 DECODER Measurement conditions set A (video encoding) 4:2:2P, GOP 1/1, 50Mbit/s, 720 pixels Measurement conditions set B (video encoding) 4:2:0MP@ML, GOP 12/3, 14Mbit/s, 720 pixels 24 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Note: COMPIN signal to noise ratio is measured in a different way in comparison with the DPSN board. In the same conditions, the value for the COMPIN board would be approximatively 3dB higher. Luminance bandwidth 0.15 to 5.5MHz 0.5dB (-3dB at 5.7MHz) Luminance signal to noise ratio (ramp pattern, filtered and weighted) set A set B 61dB 60dB Differential gain 1.5% Differential phase 2 Luminance amplitude linearity 700mV 14mV ENCODER + DECODER CHARACTERISTICS NTSC STANDARD (excluding VTR and synchronised modes) WITH MSU 4422 DECODER Measurement conditions set A (video encoding) 4:2:2P, GOP 1/1, 50Mbit/s, 720 pixels Measurement conditions set B (video encoding) 4:2:0MP@ML, GOP 12/3, 14Mbit/s, 720 pixels Luminance bandwidth (set B) 0.15 to 3.8MHz 0.5dB (-3dB at 4.1MHz) Luminance signal to noise ratio (ramp pattern, filtered and weighted) set A set B 61dB 60dB Differential gain 2% Differential phase 2 Luminance amplitude linearity 700mV 14mV ENCODER + DECODER CHARACTERISTICS PAL STANDARD (excluding VTR and synchronised modes) WITH MSU 4422 DECODER 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 25 1.4 - Specifications The COMPIN board features a VTR mode which is recommended for using bad quality, jittered signals. In VTR mode, the sampling is made on 8 bits instead of 10 and the bandwidth is around 3MHz. The COMPIN board features a built-in synchroniser. This synchroniser can be used in order to synchronise video input to an external composite video reference. This synchroniser can also be used with or without an external reference in order to help the encoder to deal with bad quality signals. The COMPIN board does not add any delay, except when the built-in synchroniser is activated and in that case it adds approximatively 30ms in 50Hz and 25ms in 60Hz. The synchroniser drops or repeats a frame when the accumulative delay between the input and the reference is excessive. Hence the lipsync evolves like a sawtooth between - 10ms and + 30ms (in 50Hz, without reference signal). In normal mode and in NTSC standard, the COMPIN board can be programmed to take into account or not a 7.5 IRE setup. 1.4.2 - Description of optional functions 1.4.2.1 - ASI TS input (option) Sales reference: N41STS1NAK ASI standard TS input on a female 75 BNC connector. The 270Mbit/s signal can carry 188/204 length TS packets. The max. TS data rate is 54Mbit/s. The TS Input interface accepts both data burst and data packet modes. Incoming data must be spread over time, so that no more than one TS packet is received over a period of 26s. The external TS ASI input can be used for encoder cascading: up to three encoders can be cascaded by connecting the ASI output of one encoder to the ASI input of another one. This results in an MPTS with consistent PSI/SI tables, each video source having its own PCR unless the locking on incoming PCR is used (see the section below). To perform encoder cascading from the front panel, only one parameter must be set. When encoders are cascaded, incoming PID/service-id can be remapped to avoid conflicts. 26 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Notes: - DBE 4110 TS OUT connected to DBE 4110 TS IN operates with a cable up to 200m in length, BELDEN 8281 type. - A programme going from ASI IN to ASI OUT will undergo a PCR jitter increase of +/- 75ns max. The maximum PCR jitter allowed by DVB standard is +/- 500ns. A programme encoded by a DBE 41XX will present an original PCR jitter of +/- 37.5 ns max. Locking on incoming PCR This function requires the ASI TS input option. It is possible to create a single programme with components generated by more than one encoder. The principal application is the generation of a programme containing one video component and many audio components, like a "mosaic" programme or a mutilingual programme. All encoders must receive the same video source (even an encoder which is used only for audio encoding), and all encoders must use the same PCR. All encoders must be set to provide the same end to end delay. The use of the same PCR by all encoders is made possible by the new ability of the encoder to lock its internal PCR generator on the PCR coming from a component present in the ASI TS input stream. We recommend that you limit the cascade to three or less devices. If a progam requires more than three encoders, it is better to install them in parallel and use a multiplexer to gather the components. TS IN VIDEO IN TS OUT DBE 41xx TS IN VIDEO IN TS OUT DBE 41xx TS IN VIDEO IN TS OUT DBE 41xx 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 27 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.2.2 - DVB Common Scr. (option) Sales reference: N41SDVCFAK This option includes the capability to scramble the outgoing transport stream according to the DVB common scrambling standard. The DBE 4110 is fully compliant with the scrambling features defined by EBU (BISS modes 1 and E), for exchanging scrambled MPEG-2 streams. The control word is fixed. The fixed control word can be set using the front panel. No ECMs are broadcast in this case, and there is no need for EMM generation. The control word must be entered in the decoder to enable descrambling. Attention : 1. The incoming stream from the ASI input cannot be scrambled from the front panel and the Fast_DSNG software. To scramble the incoming stream, the encoder must be controlled by the DBS 2930 software with the N2930140 option (fixed control word) and the DBS 2908/11/12 MPEG Channel Controller. 2. The BISS mode E is only controlled by the front panel. TS IN VIDEO IN TS OUT DBE 41xx TS IN VIDEO IN TS OUT DBE 41xx TS IN VIDEO IN TS OUT DBE 41xx TS IN TS IN TS IN TS OUT DBX 4300 28 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.4.2.3 - MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML (option) Sales reference: N41S422PAK Switching between 4:2:0MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML is not seamless. CHARACTERISTICS Video source 50/60Hz frequency Interlaced /progressive 4:2:2 video 10 bits Encoding format 720 pixels 576 lines (50Hz) or 480 lines (60Hz) GOP parameters 1 M 3 M N 24 Possibility of closed GOP Frame picture with adaptive field/frame encoding modes (motion estimation and DCT) Seamless M and N parameter changing Bit rate VBV model implementation Bit rate type: CBR Bit rate parameters: 100kbit/s steps 0.5Mbit/s bit rate 50Mbit/s (bitrates below 4Mbit/s are reserved for almost still pictures, depending on encoding resolution and picture complexity) Seamless bit rate change Miscellaneous functions Capture and transmission of Digital Vertical Time Code. 75% bar pattern insertion Video buffer management Leak mode Delay Delay from SDI encoder input to PTS value (+/- 5ms): 740ms (50Hz), 617ms (60Hz), guaranteed delay from 4 to 50Mbit/s. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 29 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.2.4 - RS232 (option) Sales reference: N41SD56KAK Description: - 1200 / 9600 / 19200 / 38400 baud, - 1 start bit, - 1 stop bit, - 8 data bits, - no parity, - protocol: raw data is directly used to supply the TS packet payload. The DBE 4110 adjusts the adaptation field of each packet according to the number of bytes received from the data injection through RS232, - SubD9 SERIAL 1 RS232 connector. 30 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.4.2.5 - Ext. Modulator C&C (option) Sales reference: N41SM0DCAK The following modulators are operated from the DBE 4110 front panel and/or from the Stand-Alone Control & Command software and/or the Fast_DSNG software: Newtec modulator parameters are included in the prestored configurations in the DBE 4110 that can be recalled at a key stroke. Notes: 1. The L band output of the modulator (IFL) is for monitoring purposes only and cannot be switched off. 2. An RS485 cord is provided with the option for Control & Command between the encoder and the modulator. Modulator models up-converters ASI input interface NTC2062 "2062ZP", "2062ZR", "2062ZQ", "2062ZK", "2062ZM", "2062ZL". NTC3631xZ "3631BZ", "3631DZ", "3631EZ", "3631FZ", "3631GZ", "3631HZ", "3631IZ", "3631KZ", "3631LZ", "3631GE", "3631AZ", "3631TB". NTC3359AE NTC2080 "2080ZP", "2080ZR", "2080ZT", "2080ZQ", "2080ZK", "2080ZM", "2080ZO", "2080ZL". NTC2077Sx "2077SP", "2077SR", "2077ST", "2077SK", "2077SM", "2077SO". without NTC2077Hx "2077HP", "2077HR", "2077HT", "2077HQ", "2077HK", "2077HM", "2077HO", "2077HL". without NTC2077Fx "2077FM", "2077FT", "2077FO", "2077FQ", "2077FL", "2077FR". without 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 31 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.2.6 - DPSN board (option) Sales reference: N41HDPSNAK This board offers the composite video input. The DPSN board fits in the upper 6U slot, instead of the COMPIN board.. Use of DPSN board adds approximately 20ms in 50Hz and 17ms in 60Hz. Caution: The COMPIN board is recommended for customers having PAL and NTSC signals. INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Standard PAL BDGHI / NTSC M / SECAM (ITU-R Rec. 624) Correction / input impedance BNC / 75 Input level (100% white bar) 1 volt peak-to-peak, nominal, with sync signal ENCODER + DECODER CHARACTERISTICS PAL STANDARD WITH MSU 4422 DECODER Measurement conditions/video encoding 4:2:0 MP@ML, 14Mbit/s, 720 pixels/line, 12/3 GOP Luminance bandwidth 0.15 to 5.5MHz 0.5dB (-3dB at 5.7MHz) Luminance signal to noise ratio (grey level) 58dB Differential gain 2% Differential phase 2 Luminance amplitude linearity 700 mV 14 mV 32 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.4.2.7 - 4 stereo audios (option) Sales reference: N41HAMUBAK Figure 1.5: Audio block diagram with AMuSE and SSEB The AMuSE board features either 4 MPEG-1 audio encoders in accordance with ISO/IEC 11172-3, layer 2, 48 kHz standard or 4 AC3 packetisers. Common features: - the AMuSE board fits in the lower 6U slot, - the DBE 4110 accepts one AMuSE board, - it is not possible to set up an AMuSE board partly in MPEG-1 encoder and partly in AC3 packetiser, - when the SDI is selected, the same group number from the four possible groups must be supplied for encoders 1 and 2. The same rule applies for encoders 3 and 4. MPEG-1 audio encoding features: - each of the four encoders can independently receive its input from the SDI or AES/EBU. The AES/EBU input is either balanced on SubD15 (AES 3/1992, 110 input impedance) or unbalanced on BNC (SMPTE 276M, 75 input ATADI board TS Out Pre-multiplexer 1&2&3&4 balanced unbalanced DAC Analogue stereo One group De-embedder One group AES/ EBU AES/ EBU AES/ EBU AES/ EBU 2 3 4 1 SDI IN SDI OUT SDI DIGITAL AUDIO SFC Encoder SFC Encoder SFC Encoder SFC Encoder Multiplexer ANALOGUE AUDIO Encoder De-embedder One group SDI Encoder DAC Analogue stereo AMuSE SSEB SDI IN 2 Analogue stereo SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 33 1.4 - Specifications impedance). The selection is made by the Control & Command station; all AES/EBU inputs are either balanced or unbalanced. - audio de-embedding is always possible and is not dependent on the video encoder input. Audio de-embedding complies with SMPTE 272M. - it supports input PCM samples at 32, 44.1 or 48kHz (SDI allows only 48kHz). - before encoding, the audio stream goes through a sample rate converter. Thus, the audio stream is resampled at 48kHz and synchronised with the programme clock reference. - for each audio encoder, possible rate / mode combinations are listed in the table below: - all command running is seamless apart from audio/video compensation delay modification. - each of the four audio encoders has audio pattern generation capability (1kHz, -6dBFS signal). - when there is no video component, the MPEG-1 encoder is in radio mode and the delay (from SDI encoder input to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes equal to 150ms (50Hz and 60Hz). AC3 packetiser features: - the AMuSE board accepts up to 4 externally encoded Dolby AC3 streams and performs PES and TS packetisation on these streams. - accepted external Dolby AC3 encoders: DP567 (AC3 stereo), DP569 (AC3 stereo and surround) - 32, 40 and 48kbit/s rates are not supported. - input data packing: professional mode 32 bit (ch1, and ch2). - external Dolby AC3 encoder sampling frequency must be set to 48kHz. - external Dolby AC3 encoder delay must be set to 179ms. - any AMuSE input can be used. If SDI input is used, the SDI input of AMuSE must be synchronous with the SDI input of SSEB. If the AES/EBU input (either balanced or unbalanced) is used, the external Dolby encoder Rate (kbit/s) Mode 64 96 128 192 256 384 Single Channel (Mono) X X X X Dual Channel X X X X Stereo X X X X Joint Stereo X X X X 34 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 must be genlocked by the sync output of AMuSE. - AMuSE AC3 packetiser is not possible together with a video component in low or ultra low delay mode. - when there is no video component, the AC3 encoder is in radio mode and the delay (from external AC3 encoder to PTS value, +/- 5ms) becomes equal to 349ms (50Hz and 60Hz). - when an AC3 component is generated, a descriptor is automatically added to the PMT (descriptor private id 106). 1.4.2.8 - 2 AES/EBU interfaces (option) Sales reference: N41HATADAK Figure 1.6: Audio block diagram with ATADI and SSEB The ATADI board provides AES/EBU interfaces for the two audio MPEG-1 encoders located on the SSEB board of the encoder. AES/EBU interfaces are either balanced on SubD15 (AES 3/1992,110 input impedance) or unbalanced on BNC (SMPTE 276M, 75 input impedance). The selection is made by the Control & Command station; all AES/EBU inputs are either balanced or unbalanced. DAC Analogue stereo Multiplexer ANALOGUE AUDIO Encoder De-embedder One group SDI Encoder DAC Analogue stereo SFC 1 & 2 balanced unbalanced AES/ EBU AES/ EBU 2 1 DIGITAL AUDIO SFC SSEB ATADI TS Out SDI IN 2 Analogue stereo AMuSE board SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 35 1.4 - Specifications The ATADI board fits in the upper 3U slot. It supports input PCM samples at 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz. The ATADI board performs a sampling frequency conversion to 48KHz, synchronised with the programme clock reference. 1.4.2.9 - Int. modulator (option) Sales reference: N41HMODUAK The ISMB board fits in the lower 6U slot. The ISMB board is an internal modulator which takes the TS stream produced by the encoder and transforms it into a modulated form. Three modulations are available : QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM. Output is both IF and L-band. When the ISMB is used, TS packets must be in (188+16) form. The features of ISMB board are listed in the following table: Standards EN 300421, EN 301210 Input Bit rate 1.5 to 28 Mbit/s FEC Energy dispersal PRBS, 24 or 32 bits Reed Solomon Encoder 188+16 format (synchro byte included) correction capability Interleaving I = 12 Convolution 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 8/9 Depth: K=7 Impulse response cos (linear phase) Roll off 26% and 35%, or Automatic (depending on modulation scheme) IF output Modulation QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM 36 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 An RS485 cord is provided with the ISMB board. This cord externally links the ISMB board to the encoder and is used for the control&command. This cord is the same as the one described in the section "External Modulator Control". "External Modulator Control" option is not required to operate the ISMB board. 1.4.2.10 - Alarm Relay Closure (option) Sales reference: N41HMSDLAK This function consists of two boards: the RSMAINT board and the MSDL board. In the event of a major alarm, an alarm loop (voltage free contact) is activated on the MSDL board. Bit/Symbol ratio 2, 3 or 4 Symbol rate 0.9 to 16 MSymbol/s Frequency (RF) variable 70/140MHz, selectable within 50 to 180MHz range, by 125KHz step Stability +/- 15ppm Level -20dBm to +5dBm, by 0.5dB steps Amplitude accuracy +/- 0.2dB Quadrature error +/- 2 Eye closure 5% (full Nyquist filtering) Return loss -23dB min. Phase noise -96dBc at F=100kHz Harmonics -45dB min. Spurious performance (modulated carrier) in 4KHz -55dBc/4kHz at -10dBm (ref. INTELSAT -IESS) IF LO Local oscillator for block-converter synchronisation 100MHz L-Band O/P Frequency range 0.950 to 1.750GHz by 1kHz step Stability +/- 50ppm Level variable, -20dBm to +5dBm, by 0.5dB step 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 37 1.4 - Specifications It is possible to activate the alarm relay either on major alarms or on major and minor alarms. The choice is made in the encoder advanced parameters in the {Technical configuration} application. RSMAINT board This board is connected to the front of the device, behind the front panel, in the upper slot, and provides frontal access to the normal/fail switch associated with the alarm relay (MSDL board). The RSMAINT board also hosts a maintenance RS232 link (SubD9). MSDL board This board hosts the alarm relay and the corresponding SubD9 connector giving access to the two voltage free contacts. The maximum DC voltage supported is 48V. The MSDL board also hosts the Dynamux SubD9 connector. The MSDL board fits in the lower 3U slot. 1.4.2.11 - XLR adapter cord (option) Sales reference: N41HAXLRAK This is an adapter cord with one end terminated by four XLR connectors and the other end terminated by a SubD15 connector. The cord is approximatively one metre long. It can be used with SSEB analogue audio inputs, or ATADI digital audio inputs, or AMuSE digital audio inputs. 1.4.2.12 - Source switching tolerance When the video input signal of the encoder is the result of a switch between two signals, a transient perturbation can be observed, its importance and its duration depend on the following factors: timing relationship between the two signals, instant of the switch (relative to beginning of a frame), encoder video input used (SDI, composite), encoder video processing involved. When the video input signal is the result of a switch between two signals which are synchronous (same 27MHz for both) and if the switching action is compliant with 38 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 SMPTE RP168 (which mainly defines line number and part of line allowed for swiching), the following table predicts the visible effect of the switch: 1.4.3 - AC power supply Video input and processing Time difference between switched signals a a.Outside this range, there is a possibility of a black output after the switching during a few seconds. Effects on video SDI on SSEB/ SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during one image analogue on DPSN / SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during several images analogue on COMPIN / SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during several images analogue on COMPIN - (syn- chroniser mode) / SSEB any image perturbation during several images analogue on COMPIN - (VTR mode) / SSEB 0 to +/- 9s image perturbation during several images analogue on COMPIN - (VTR and synchroniser modes) / SSEB 0 to +/- 1/2 line image perturbation during several images CHARACTERISTICS Mains voltage 100V - 230V (one range with no switching) Mains frequency 50Hz - 60Hz Current rating 2A - 1A Inrush current < 50A at 230V (cold start) Network connection Type A device connected by a non-indus- trial CEI 60320 compliant plug 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 39 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.4 - Mechanical characteristics Unit width: 19, Unit mounting centre distance in cabinet: 467mm, Unit height: 2U (88mm), Unit depth (including connectors): 620mm Isolation class I Installation category II Earthing arrangement TN, TT a Mains fuse T4A H250V, dimensions 5x20mm a.For Norway and only for this country, the device can be connected to an earthing arrangement of IT type for a voltage between phases of 230V. Other features of the power supply unit Power factor (cos ) 0.98 Performance factor 70% (typical on 230VAC) Overheating protection yes a a.After overheating protection has triggered, the DBE 4110 will only re-start after OFF/ON on the power outlet switch. Overload protection yes Fuse integrated CHARACTERISTICS 40 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 1.7: Dimensions 448 620 Air Inlet Air Outlet 483 88 MPEG-2 DBE 4110 DVB ESC ENT SHIFT 467 6.35 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 41 1.4 - Specifications Weight: 13.7kg in its basic version, 15.3kg in its heaviest version. The exact weight depends on the presence of the optional modules; the following tables give the exact weight of each module with the corresponding slot allocation seen from the rear panel of the equipment. Notes: 1. A 2TE cache is delivered with the 4TE AMuSE board to fill 6TE slot number 2. 2. If there is no board in a slot, a cache is set in the empty allocation. slot 0 slot 4 slot 1 slot 3 slot 2 Slot allocation DBE 4110 chassis (without board) 10.60kg 0 SSEB board 1.87kg 1 DPSN board or COMPIN board 0.88kg 0.90kg 2 AMuSE board + 2TE (see note 1) ISMB board or 6TE 6U cache (see note 2) 1.03 + 0.18kg 1.15kg 0.17kg 3 MSDL board or 3TE 6U cache (see note 2) 0.33kg 0.08kg 4 ATADI board or 3TE 4U cache (see note 2) 0.33kg 0.06kg In the front panel RSMAINT board 0.06kg 42 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 1.4.5 - Environmental specifications CE labelling In compliance with the 93/68/CEE (22/07/93) directive. Safety specifications Legislation Complies with European Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC (73/02) amended by 93/68/EEC. Standards EN 60950 recommendations, 3rd edition, 2000/06, UL 60950 and CSA C22.2 N950-095, certification file n E226371. Electromagnetic specifications Legislation Complies with Directive 89/336/EEC (73/02) amended by 93/68/EEC (93/07). Standards EN 55022, edition 1999 for Emission, including EN 61000-3-2, EN 55024, edition 1999 for Immunity, FCC Part 15, Class A. Relative humidity: 90% max., non condensing at 40C (in operation). Operating temperature range: 0C to 45C (80% R.H.max, non condensing). Storage temperature range: -10C to 70C. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 43 1.4 - Specifications Mechanical specifications: Shock, transport category, TQC-TCE FP-M 204e level 2, Vibrations: during operation: - vertical amplitude: - constant displacement 0.75mm peak to peak from 10 to 31Hz, - constant acceleration 1.5G (peak) from 31 to 150 Hz. - sweep rate: 1 octave per minute, - duration of 1 sweep cycle: 7.8 mn, - quantity of sweep cycles: 10, - 3 axes. Ventilated air flow: 100m 3 /h (the DBE 41xx has fans for forced air cooling). The output air is hotter than the input air, about 5C. Pollution degree: 2 Protection degree: IP 20 44 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Reliability: table of MTBF at 30 Basic encoder without hardware options: MTBF at 30C is 108,000h. Item MTBF (h) Power supply Alpha 400 (AC) SSEB Front panel LCD Backplane DPSN COMPIN AMuSE ATADI MSDL RSMAINT ISMB 563 000 190 000 1 940 000 6 250 000 631 000 812 000 399 000 2 940 000 9 630 000 > 20 000 000 909 000 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 1 45 1.4 - Specifications 1.4.6 - Equipment view Figure 1.8: DBE 4110 unit top view BACK connectors BOARDS MAINS 9U F A N S F A N Front Panel POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE maintenance link normal/fail switch 600 AIR FLOW AIR FLOW 420 448 19 (483) FRONT 20 46 Chapter 1 1.4 - Specifications THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 1.9: DBE 4110 rear and front panel MPEG-2 DBE 4110 DVB ESC ENT SHIFT SDI IN SERIAL 1 LAN SERIAL 2 PCR OUT RS 232/485 10BaseT RS 485 TS ASI IN OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 I O T Ph N COMPOSiTE VIDEO IN DPSN ON MONITOR FREQ GAIN EQ SSEB ATADI BALANCED UNBALANCED AUDIO IN ANALOG REMOTE IF LO IF OUT L BAND OUT ALARM 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 - Installation 47
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2.6.1 - Installing a board............................................................................ 97 2.6.2 - Removing the board....................................................................... 98 2.7 - Installing software options.................................................................. 99 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 49
" PROCEDURE The following five steps are necessary before your encoder is ready for use: 1) Install the encoder. Installation involves the following steps: manually set switches. observe certain principles. install the encoder in a rack. 2) Connect the encoder to other devices. 3) Switch on the device. 4) Adjust the cable corrector if the link exceeds 10m. 5) Install the control and command software. These various operations are described in the following sections. 50 Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2.1 - ENCODER INSTALLATION The DBE 4110 encoder is designed for use in a horizontal position. The On/Off switch and the power cord should be within reach so that the device can be switched off easily. 2.1.1 - Manual switch setting " SSEB board - Set input impedance (audio) The four switches LEFT 1, RIGHT 1, LEFT 2 and RIGHT 2 (mark 1) set incoming audio impedance. Each one comprises 2 switches which must be moved as a pair. The default setting is 600. Figure 2.1: SSEB board switch setting Switch Up: high impedance Switch Down: 600 impedance 1 UP 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 51 2.1 - Encoder installation " MSDL and RSMAINT boards - The different elements of alarm relay closure are shown in the following block diagram: Figure 2.2: Alarm relay closure diagram Enabling/Disabling the alarm relay In the event of a prompt alarm from the main processing board, a contact dry loop is activated on the MSDL board. The S2 switch (RSMAINT board) disables the alarm relay. The red LED (UNIT FAIL) comes on on the front panel of the device to signal the presence of a prompt alarm (regardless of S2 setting). Note: Do not forget to set the S2 switch from "Test/Alarm" back to "Normal" once the fault has been corrected. Alarm monitoring 1 = Alarm S1 & S2: Choice of alarm relay mode SSEB 1 6 SubD9 Alarm Relay MSDL normal normal (fail) 1 (fail) RSMAINT N T/A switch S2 Unit Fail LED on Encoder front panel 1 = on 0 = relay closed (normal) 1 = relay open (alarm) 0 = relay open (normal) 1 = relay closed (alarm) CLOSED: PB OPEN: PB 52 Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Choice of alarm relay mode In a system configuration with several DBE 41xx devices, the user can choose to interconnect the dry contacts of the alarm relays in series or parallel. The setting of the two microswitches on the MSDL board determines either open or closed contact mode: - choosing open contact for the alarm relay, associated with an unack- nowledged fault means that all dry loop contacts must be set in series, - choosing closed contact for the alarm relay, associated with an unack- nowledged fault means that all dry loop contacts must be set in parallel. Note: The dry contact always signals an operating fault, including a power failure and device shutdown. Micro-switch on MSDL board open: PB closed: PB Fault no yes no yes Switch S2 (N-T/A) on RSMAINT board left (N) right (T/A) left (N) right (T/A) left (N) right (T/A) left (N) right (T/A) Comment no comment loop test unack. fault ack. fault no comment loop test unack. fault ack. fault Contact status closed open open closed open closed closed open Red "UNIT FAIL" LED off on on on off on on on 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 53 2.1 - Encoder installation 2.1.2 - Desktop installation The DBE 4110 encoder is fitted with four small plastic feet to ensure a minimum space of 1cm is guaranteed between the power supply of the encoder and the desktop for safety reasons. 2.1.3 - Rack installation Principles " Prevent outgoing hot air being reinjected into other devices. " Ensure an equal and acceptable air flow to the air-capture points of all devices. " Avoid the effects due to natural convection between devices. " Avoid short-cuts between hot and cold air and vice versa. " Avoid transversal effects with connected racks. " Avoid thermal pockets (obstruction of hot air). " Check the air flow rate that will be used. If the encoder is installed in a rack, the plastic feet can be removed. The device should be mounted on L-profiles in the rack. These should be low profile to ensure adequate air flow (see Figure 2.3). Note: The DBE 4110 encoder does not feature air filters. If used in a dusty environment, a filtered rack should be used. 54 Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The various types of L-profile are shown below: Figure 2.3: Possible installation types 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U Encoder front panel 1) Standard L-profiles 2) Special L-profiles 3) Widened L-profiles 2cm min. 4cm max. Encoder front panel Encoder front panel Encoder front panel Encoder front panel Encoder front panel 4cm V V 5mm D = depends on rack Side view Front view 2cm 4cm 4cm 4cm D 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 55 2.1 - Encoder installation 2.1.4 - Mains power supply and protective earth 2.1.4.1 - Power supply " " " " 100 - 230V AC Mains Power Connector Figure 2.4: Mains power connector Fuse Fuse characteristics: T4AH250V, dimensions 5 x 20mm, can be accessed from the power connector. Mains power supply cable The mains cable is not supplied with the device. You are advised to use a mains cable with the following features: Device end of cable: CEI320 compliant connector, Wire: 3x1mm 2 or 18 AWG section, 10A minimum compliant with the appli- cable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed, Mains outlet end of cable: plug compliant with the applicable standard or rules of the country where the device is installed. Important: For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse. fuse holder On/Off switch mains connector 56 Chapter 2 2.1 - Encoder installation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Mains supplies connecting The equipment is pluggable type A. The building installation must feature overload and earth fault protection and a bipolar cut-off device or a differential circuit break. The connection panel should comply with the legislation in force in the country of installation. Connection panel position in the rack must ensure that plug and power cord are within easy reach for switching off purposes. Ensure that the device is connected correctly. If you are in any doubt, consult a qualified electrician. 2.1.4.2 - Connection to the techical earth The pin to the right of the connector is used to ground the device to ensure equipo- tential grounding between the different devices in the technical centre 2.1.4.3 - On/Off switch While the encoder is not connected to other devices, keep the On/Off switch set to Off. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 57 2.2 - Board connections 2.2 - BOARD CONNECTIONS Once the encoder itself has been installed, the boards need to be connected. The DBE 4110 device has five slots of 402mm depth: - 2 x 6 U slots - 2 x 3 U slots - 1 x 9 U slot. Figure 2.5: DBE 4110 encoder rear panel Note: You are strongly recommended not to leave empty slots without blank panels as ventilation could be impaired. Slot 0 (9U 5TE) Slot 4 (3U 4TE) Slot 3 (3U 6TE) Slot 1 (6U 4TE) Slot 2 (6U 6TE) DBE 4110 COMPIN or DPSN (option) SSEB (standard) AMuSE (option) or ISMB (option) Alarm Relay Closure ATADI (option) (option) 58 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2.2.1 - SSEB board (slot 0) SSEB board Connector Description # AUDIO IN ANALOGUE 2 stereo audio / 2 double mono inputs are available on a 15-pin female Sub-D connector. Characteristics: Balanced signal, Female Sub-D connector, Input impedance: 600 / 18k (manual switching on the board), Inputs without transformer. The DBE 4110 is provided with a SubD - 4 XLR adapter cord. Each channel is assigned an XLR connector, as described in the following table. 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 4 5 GNDL1 6 7 9 /R1 L1 GNDR1 L2 /L1 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 /L2 GNDL2 /R2 GNDR2 R2 R1 GND GND GND XLR colour Channel brown Left channel 1 (L1, /L1, GNDL1) red Right channel 1 (R1, /R1, GNDR1) orange Left channel 2 (L2, /L2, GNDL2) yellow Right channel 2 (R2, /R2, GNDR2) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 59 2.2 - Board connections $ SDI IN The "SDI input" connector receives a 270Mbit/s SDI signal in serial format (625 and 525 lines). Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. Cable length is 0-200m. % SERIAL 1 RS232/485 The "SERIAL 1 RS232/485 syn./async. private data" connector is used to inject low flow digital data into the DBE 4110. Characteristics in RS232 asynchronous mode: Female 9-pin Sub-D connector, For RS232 asynchronous mode, only pins 2, 3 & 5 are used. For other modes, contact NEXTREAM. SSEB board 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 4 5 TX RX 6 7 8 9 /TX /RX TX CK RX CK GND /RX CK /TX CK 60 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 & LAN 10BaseT Depending on the type of the SSEB board, the LEDs have different signalling (see below). To know the board type installed in the equipment, select the OTHER/Tools/About/Information command on the device front panel. The board type (HWD 1,2 or 4) is given on the third line. The Ethernet link is dedicated to device supervision. This link is also used for injecting ECMs and low bitrate data (64 kb/s). Characteristics: 10BaseT connector according to IEEE 802.3 standard, Rated transmission bitrate: 10Mb/s, Maximum cable length: 10 metres (unshielded twisted pairs), 3 LEDs to indicate link operation. Rx = Rx frames received by the device Tx = Tx frames sent by the device LINK = link on (carrier detected). SSEB board 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 R x L I N K T x Ethernet LEDs, HWD 4 type 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 61 2.2 - Board connections & LAN 10BaseT Or TRAFFIC ON= Rx and/or Tx frames exchanged POLARITY ON= Rx pair polarity correct LINK = link level set (test pulses exchanged with partner)). Cables used: For a direct connection to an operating station, use a cross cable to link the Tx pairs of the Encoders RJ45 connector to the Rx pairs of the PCs RJ45 connector. The cable delivered with the device is a cross cable. For connection to a hub, you are generally advised to use a straight (point to point) cable as crossing often occurs in the HUB which then bears the X symbol. Please refer to the Hub User Manual. SSEB board 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 T R A F F I C L I N K P O L A R I T Y Ethernet LEDs, HWD 1 or 2 type DBE 4110 PC Ethernet 10BaseT cross cable DBE 4110 HUB Ethernet 10BaseT straight cable PC Ethernet 10BaseT straight cable x 62 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 ' SERIAL 2 RS485 The RS485 9-pin Sub-D connector marked SERIAL 2 RS485 is used to control the Newtec modulator. Characteristics: Female 9-pin Sub-D connector, Asynchronous RS485, Maximum transmission rate: 38400 bauds. For other uses, contact NEXTREAM. SSEB board 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 4 5 RX TX 6 7 8 9 /RX /TX reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 63 2.2 - Board connections ( PCR OUT Characteristics: SubD 9 connector The PCR is computed on 42 bits, at a 27MHz frequency. The 33 msb (most significant bits) are the base and the 9 lsb (least significant bits) the extension. The "PCR out" connector only sends the 33 msb. PCR recurrence is 26.5 hours. ) TS ASI IN This connector accepts a signal in TS serial format (ASI mode). Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. SSEB board 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 5 CK WIN 6 7 8 /CK /WIN DATA GND /DATA CLOCK 6.75 MHz PCR WIN 33 bits 42 undefined bits PCR base SERIAL PCR base CLOCK B32 B31 1 34 76 B30 B29 B28 B27 B0 B1 PCR WIN SERIAL PCR base Zoom Zoom 64 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 * TS ASI OUT Three connectors deliver a signal in TS serial format (ASI mode). Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. SSEB board 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 5 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 65 2.2 - Board connections 2.2.2 - DPSN board (slot 1) DPSN board Connector Description # COMPOSITE VIDEO IN The "composite video input" connector receives an analogue compo- site video input signal. Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. $ GAIN, FREQ and ON See section 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input - for information on using the GAIN and FREQ potentiometers and the meaning of the "ON" LED. % MONITOR The MONITOR output is used for adjusting cable correction, parti- cularly in the case of links exceeding 10 m. Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. 1 2 3 66 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2.2.3 - COMPIN board (slot 1) COMPIN board Connector Description # COMPOSITE VIDEO IN The "composite video input" connector receives an analogue compo- site video input signal. Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. $ GAIN, FREQ and EQ See section 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input - for information on using the GAIN and FREQ potentiometers and the meaning of the "EQ" LED. % MON OUT The MONITOR output is used for adjusting cable correction, parti- cularly in the case of links exceeding 10 m, or for monitoring purposes. The MONITOR output is not suitable for measurements on the signal. Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. 1 2 3 4 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 67 2.2 - Board connections & REF IN The REF IN connector can receive either a composite video input signal or a black burst to allow video input stream synchronisation. If the board is in synchroniser mode, but without any REF IN signal, then the board synchronises the video input stream with an internal reference. Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. COMPIN board 1 2 3 4 68 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2.2.4 - AMUSE board (slot 2) AMuSE board Connector Description # SDI IN The SDI 270 Mbit/s serial input features up to eight embedded stereo audio channels. This interface has the following features: SDI compliant with SMPTE 259M (4:2:2 Component part), Embedding compliant with SMPTE 272M. Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. 1 2 3 4 5 6 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 69 2.2 - Board connections # SDI OUT Description: The AMuSE board duplicates the incoming SDI signal to supply the SSEB board, thereby avoiding the need for an external distribu- tion amplifier. "SDI OUT" is an active loop-through of the SDI input, after signal reshaping. This copy is used, either to monitor the input, or to cascade the AMuSE board with a video compression board (SSEB). For these 2 applications you do not require a long cable. "SDI out" is compliant with the 259M SMPTE standard, for a maximum cable length of 50 metres. Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. AMuSE board 1 2 3 4 5 6 SDI in Optional AMuSE board Up to 4 AES3 SDI loop through SSEB board TS Out DBE 41xx on Backplane 70 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 $ AUD DIN Bal The digital audio inputs are an alternative solution to SDI embedded audio. Description: Two sets of connectors/standards are available to the user: SubD15 and AES IN 1 to 4. Characteristics: balanced: a specific cable is provided with the board. This cable links the SubD15 connector to 4 XLR female connectors (110, balanced). Each XLR has its own colour, as described in the following table: % AUD DIN Unbal unbalanced: four BNC female connectors, compliant with SMPTE 276M (75, 1V unbalanced). AMuSE board 1 2 3 4 5 6 Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 4 5 ShieldIN1 6 7 9 IN2- IN1+ ShieldIN2 IN3+ IN1- 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 IN3- ShieldIN3 IN4- ShieldIN4 IN4+ IN2+ GND GND GND XLR colour Channels brown Digital stereo (IN1-, IN1+, ShieldIN1) red Digital stereo (IN2-, IN2+, ShieldIN2) orange Digital stereo (IN3-, IN3+, ShieldIN3) yellow Digital stereo (IN4-, IN4+, ShieldIN4) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 71 2.2 - Board connections & CTRL OUT Description: This interface is reserved for controlling and monitoring an external audio encoder, a Dolby AC-3 Multichannel Encoder (DP569). Characteristics: SubD9 female connector, asynchronous, RS 485. AMuSE board 1 2 3 4 5 6 Dolby AC-3 Surround encoder DP569 AMuSE board SSEB board Up to 3 AES3 ctrl/cmd Gen lock IEC1937 in AES3 Ethernet TS out ctrl + clk TS output Backplane DBE 4110 Encoder Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 5 RX- TX+ 6 7 8 RX+ TX- GND NC GND 4 GND 9 GND 72 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 ' REF OUT Description: This interface is used to synchronise an external audio encoder. It allows the external Dolby AC-3 encoder to be locked onto the video clock. Characteristics: generates muted PCM samples at 48 kHz, and locked onto the video clock of the associated SSEB board, Female BNC coaxial connector, compliant with SMPTE 276M (75, 1V, unbalanced). ( LED Not relevant AMuSE board 1 2 3 4 5 6 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 73 2.2 - Board connections 2.2.5 - ISMB board (slot 2) ISMB board Connector Description # REMOTE The "REMOTE" RS485 connector is used for the control and command link. Characteristics: Female Sub-D 9-pin connector: The cable is delivered with the device. Pay attention to the direction of this cable. $ IF LO Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75., Frequency : 100MHz. 1 REMOTE IF LO IF OUT L BAND OUT 2 3 4 Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 4 5 /RX 6 7 8 9 RX TX GND /TX 74 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 % IF OUT Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. & L BAND OUT Characteristics: Female BNC coaxial connector, Impedance: 75. ISMB board 1 REMOTE IF LO IF OUT L BAND OUT 2 3 4 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 75 2.2 - Board connections 2.2.6 - ATADI board (slot 4) ATADI board Connector Description # AES IN Two digital audios can be input on the ATADI board, either on a SubD (balanced) or on XLR connectors (unbalanced). The choice between BNC and XLR is user-programmable for each audio. Description: This connector accepts the two digital audio inputs in balanced form. A specific cable is shipped with the board. This cable links the SubD15 connector to 4 XLR female connectors (the same type of cable as for the AMuSE board or the SSEB board) but only two XLR connectors are used. Characteristics: Female SubD15 connector, Impedance: 110 , Balanced. Each XLR has its own colour, as described in the following table. 2 1 Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 4 5 IN1G 6 7 9 IN2- IN1+ IN2G NC IN1- 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 NC GND NC GND NC IN2+ GND GND GND XLR colour Channel brown Digital stereo (IN1-, IN1+, IN1GND) red Digital stereo (IN2-, IN2+, IN2GND) 76 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 $ AES IN Description: These connectors accept the two digital audio inputs in unbalanced form. Characteristics: two 75 female BNC connectors, compliant with SMPTE 276 M standard (75, 1V unbalanced). Left BNC input is linked to SSEB audio encoder no. 1. Right BNC input is linked to SSEB audio encoder no. 2. Use a FILOTEX KX6-A type cable or equivalent assembled with a 75 male BNC connector from RADIALL (ref.: R142085000) or equivalent. ATADI board 2 1 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 77 2.2 - Board connections 2.2.7 - Alarm Relay Closure This function is implemented by two boards: RSMAINT board Connector Description # Coding wheel (should be set to 0 for normal operation) $ ALARM N - T/A switch (N: normal, T/A: test-acknowledgement) % RESET RESET pushbutton (reserved for maintenance) & RS232 Male SubD 9 connector (reserved for maintenance) 1 2 4 3 1 5 6 9 0 78 Chapter 2 2.2 - Board connections THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 ALARM (MSDL) board (slot 3) # STATISTI- CAL MULTI- PLEXING SubD 9 connector (for DBE 4130 only) $ ALARM Alarm output for remoting prompt alarms. In a system configura- tion, the alarm outputs of the different devices can be grouped by paralleling the contacts which are normally open (i.e. when there are no prompt alarms) or serialising the normally closed contacts. The configuration of the "normally open" or "normally closed" contacts depends on the setting of two switches on the alarm board. Characteristics: SubD 9 connector 1 2 Contact Signal Contact Signal 1 2 3 4 5 NC NC 6 7 8 9 NC NC DL1 NC DL2 NC NC 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 79 2.2 - Board connections 2.2.8 - Modulator Control&Command A 0.5m length cable is supplied with this option, N41SM0DCAH. The two ends of the cable are different. The labels on the cable show which end should be connected to the encoder and which to the modulator. The cable features 110 termination resistance. 80 Chapter 2 2.3 - Switching on the device THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2.3 - SWITCHING ON THE DEVICE Ensure that the device is properly grounded before power-up. On the rear panel, connect the power cable and turn the power switch to ON. When the device is switched on, check that the green "POWER" LED on the front panel is on. If not, refer to the "Troubleshooting" chapter. When switched on, the device runs an autotest after which the main screen is displayed (see Welcome and main screens page 108). Caution: When the DBE 4110 encoder is first switched on, the non volatile RAM is initialised with a configuration not defining any service. It is necessary to create or recall a service. Refer to the "PC operation - Control & Command software" chapter. When the device is switched on, the last active configuration is loaded. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 81 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input 2.4 - CABLE CORRECTOR IN THE CASE OF A COMPOSITE INPUT The cable corrector is useful for links exceeding 10m. 2.4.1 - DPSN board Switch SE1 (in the figure of the DPSN board below) is used to adjust the FREQ. and GAIN potentiometers for cable correction. When the settings are active, the green "ON" LED is on and the bandwidth and the gain can be adjusted. To adjust the cable corrector: switch off the device, extract the board - on extraction and insertion of the board, check that the metal joints that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned, set the SE1 switch to 1 - in setting 2 (factory setting), the SE1 switch deactivates the cable corrector, insert the board, inject a multiburst signal, through the cable to be equalised, at the composite video input, connect a monitor to the MONITOR access on the board, increase signal amplitude to the required level with the GAIN setting, adjust the bandwidth of the cable corrector with the FREQ. setting. 82 Chapter 2 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 2.6: Part of DPSN board 2.4.2 - COMPIN board Switches S1 and S3 (in the figure of the COMPIN board below) are used to adjust the FREQ. and GAIN potentiometers for cable correction. When the settings are active, the green EQ LED is on and the bandwidth and the gain can be adjusted. To adjust the cable corrector: switch off the device, extract the board - on extraction and insertion of the board, check that the metal joints that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned, set S1 and S3 switches together towards the MONITOR connector - set S1 and S3 switches together towards the Composite video IN connector (factory setting), the switches deactivate the cable corrector, insert the board, J4 J2 MA500 MA520 MX1 L 3 L630 MA11 C695 C 6 9 3 C691 C 2 8 6 CR110 MA34 MN6 TP683 TP682 TP681 TP680 TP642 TP641 TP640 TP687 TP686 TP685 TP684 MN5 H3 H1 Q 1 8 0 Q641 SE1 C600 T P 1 0 0 TP620 TP20 TP600 TP11 C614 C615 C617C616 P1 L520 L500 L540 FL100 FL101 C 7 0 2 C 1 7 6 C 5 2 3 C 5 0 3 C520 C500 M N 5 1 MA12 MN33 R 7 1 7 R709 R703 R700 C83 R 7 1 R 7 3 C93R77 R 1 4 6 R 6 2 2 R 1 8 2 R 1 8 4 C 1 7 2 R 1 8 0 R 6 4 4 C 6 4 1 R 6 4 8 C 6 4 2 R 6 4 9 C 1 7 3 R 1 7 3 R640 R642 R 2 4 R609 R610 R 7 C 7 R 5 R620 R141 C111 C631 C630 C 1 2 5 C 1 2 0 C118 C 1 1 4 C 1 1 3 C 6 2 7 C 6 2 6 C625 C 6 2 4 C 6 2 9 C628 C621 C620 C647 C191 C 1 9 0 C605 C 6 0 3 C 6 1 3 C 6 1 2 C 6 1 1 C 6 0 9 C607 C606 C 1 1 9 Q640 FL1 FL2 MN20 MN19 MN21 MA22 MA10 MA14 MA13 MA16 MA15 MA18 MA20 MA33 MA17 M A 3 1 MA32 M A 1 MA30 MA28 MN23 MN40 MN41 M N 3 2 MN31 MN43 M A 2 MN37 MN8 MA37 MA36 MN26 MA7 MA8 MN22 MN2 MN53 MA19 MN18 MN30 MN50 M N 4 6 M N 1 5 S5 S4 S3 S2 S13 S 1 0 S 1 1 SE680 SE71 MA35 MN27 MN24 MN25 MN4 MA21 MN28 J1 J3 P1_2 P1_1 R 2 4 8 R 1 6 4 R604 F 5 2 0 F 5 0 0 F 5 4 0 L6 L 1 L4 L 2 L 2 8 0 L170 L 2 5 L 6 0 0 TP9 TP4 TP3 TP2 TP10 TP15 TP14 TP8 R 1 9 2 C 6 4 3 5 4 0 C 2 8 2 DS4 DS2 DS150 DS1 MN14 MN52 17 14 11 K K K K 1
2
3 1
3
2 SE1 GAIN FREQ ON MONITOR 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 83 2.4 - Cable corrector in the case of a composite input inject a multiburst signal, through the cable to be equalised, at the composite video input, connect a monitor to the MONITOR access on the board, increase signal amplitude to the required level with the GAIN setting, adjust the bandwidth of the cable corrector with the FREQ. setting. Figure 2.7: Part of COMPIN board S1/S3 FREQ EQ MONITOR GAIN 84 Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2.5 - INSTALLING STAND-ALONE SOFTWARE 2.5.1 - Scope The stand-alone software supplied with the encoder is designed to control a single encoder. The stand-alone software comprises a set of basic applications for declaring, configuring and supervising the encoder. 2.5.2 - Installation 2.5.2.1 - Environment The software runs with Windows NT4.0 and Windows 2000 operating systems. To run the {Alarm Help} and {Event Log} applications, the "Interbase 6" database manager must be installed. This manager is included in the "Stand-Alone" software and can be installed when the "Stand-Alone" software itself is first installed. Note: with WINDOWS NT or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems, "Administrator" rights are needed to install the database manager. Minimum requirements for the PC designated to support the software are: 300 MHz Pentium II microprocessor, WINDOWS NT version 4 or WINDOWS 2000 operating system, ETHERNET board, TCP/IP command interface (MicroSoft TCP/IP-32), mouse, colour monitor with 17" screen, SVGA resolution (800 x 600). Note: release 7.0 of the software requires a system library (comctl32.dll) which may not be up-to-date on certain Windows NT 4.0 versions (in particular on service pack 3 with Internet Explorer 3). The software installation program tests the version number of this library and offers to 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 85 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software install a Microsoft patch to correct the problem. "Administrator" rights and a PC reboot are needed to install this patch. 2.5.2.2 - Interface language for the applications The interface language of the {Alarm Help} application corresponds to the one chosen in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings WinNT or Regional Options Win2000) before installation, i.e. French for French-speaking countries and English for the others. For the other applications, French and English will be installed systematically and the required language can be chosen using the Regional Settings application in the Windows Control Panel. Figure 2.8: Regional Settings (WinNT) or Regional Options (Win 2000) 2.5.2.3 - Setup procedure The software is supplied on CD-ROM. 1. Insert the CD-ROM in the PC drive. 2. Double-click on the Setup.exe file in the Stand-Alone/Disk1 directory to begin installing the software. The Wizard is then loaded to help you install the 86 Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 software. Figure 2.9: Loading the Wizard 3. If release 7.0 of the "Stand-Alone" software is being installed on the PC for the first time and the user rights are not "Administator", the following window is displayed: Clicking on OK displays the following dialogue box. Clicking on OK displays Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete. The software has not been installed. 4. If release 7.0 of the "Stand-Alone" software has already been installed or the PC user rights are "Administrator", the first dialogue box displayed is used to select a software installation directory. A default directory is proposed. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 87 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software Figure 2.10: Default directory 5. To choose another directory, click on Browse and indicate the directory and the path (e.g., c:\dvb\dbs2930v6.5\V65program). Figure 2.11: Changing directories 88 Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 6. If the directory does not already exist, confirm whether or not you want it to be created. Figure 2.12: Creating a new directory Figure 2.13: New directory 7. Click on Next>. 8. The following dialogue box is used to validate DBS 2930 software options. This dialogue box is not used in Stand-Alone mode. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 89 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software Figure 2.14: Validating DBS 2930 options 9. Do not fill in this window and click on Next. 10.A new dialogue box is displayed. It is used to rename the directory in the Program Folder which contains the icons representing the various software applications. Both the icons and this directory are automatically generated during the software setup phase. 90 Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 2.15: Icon directory 11.Click on Next>. Setup is run (file loading and icon creation). Figure 2.16: Running setup 12.When setup is complete and if the database manager has already been installed, Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete is displayed. If version 7.0 of the software is being installed on the PC for the first time, the 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 91 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software "Interbase" database manager installation initialisation window is displayed. Figure 2.17: Initialising database manager installation The following window is then displayed: Figure 2.18: Database manager welcome screen 13.Click on Next to display the database manager user licence agreement screen. 92 Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 2.19: Licence agreement 14.Read the contents of the licence and click on I Agree to begin installing the manager. Figure 2.20: Installing the database manager The following window is displayed to show that setup is complete: 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 93 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software Figure 2.21: Database manager setup complete 15.Click on Finish to display the "Stand-Alone" software setup complete window. Figure 2.22: "Stand-Alone" software setup complete 16.Click on Finish to exit "Stand-Alone" software setup. 94 Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 2.23: Installation directory contents Figure 2.24: Software application icons 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 95 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software 2.5.3 - Running the software After running WINDOWS on the operating PC and opening the directory containing the software applications, the following panel is displayed: Figure 2.25: Icon display The icons represent the Stand-Alone software applications. The following order must be observed when running the software: 1. Open a session by double-clicking on the Equipment Interface icon to run the {Equipment Interface} application. 2. Declare the device from the {Equipment Installation} application. This step is unnecessary if the device has already been declared in a previous session. 3. Set the technical configuration of the device from the {Technical Configuration} application. This step is unnecessary if the device has already been set in a previous session. 4. Run the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application to monitor the device. 5. The {Event Log} application is used to view events occurring on the Encoder (alarms, reboot, etc.). 6. The {Alarm Help} application explains the meaning of alarms displayed in Notes: 1. To shut down a session, it is advisable to close this application after all the others, otherwise a "Some Applications are still connected; Do you really want to quit anyway?" warning message will ask you to confirm application shut down. 2. It is advisable to leave this application open when the device is being used, even if no other application is run. 96 Chapter 2 2.5 - Installing Stand-Alone software THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application. Notes: 1. The {Download Embedded Software} application is used by NEXTREAM to download embedded software. 2. The {ATM Connect Management} application does not concern the DBE 4130 Encoder/ADSL SuperEncoder. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 97 2.6 - Installing optional boards 2.6 - INSTALLING OPTIONAL BOARDS 2.6.1 - Installing a board Figure 2.26: DBE 4110 rear panel Switch off the device. Remove the blank panel. Carefully slide in the board whilst keeping the extractors open. When the board is nearly all the way in, start closing the extractors by pushing them towards the centre of the board. Check that the metal joins that ensure electromagnetic continuity are correctly positioned and that the centring pins are aligned with the centring holes. Press gently to engage the connectors. When the board is completely inserted, secure it with the screws. Switch the device on. To change the hardware configuration, switch to "local" mode in the OTHER/Tools/Control menu on the front panel. Declare the board via the DBE 4110s front panel ("OTHER/Tools/Option/Hardware" menu). Reboot the device. Note: A 2TE blank panel is delivered with the 4TE AMuSE board to fill 6TE slot 2. COMPIN or DPSN (option) SSEB (standard) AMuSE or ISMB (option) + blank panel, Alarm Relay Closure ATADI (option) (option) see note 98 Chapter 2 2.6 - Installing optional boards THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2.6.2 - Removing the board Switch off the device. Follow the installation procedure in reverse order. Undeclare the board via the DBE 4110s front panel. Note: A blank panel must be set in the empty slot. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 2 99 2.7 - Installing software options 2.7 - INSTALLING SOFTWARE OPTIONS If the options are delivered with the device, they are directly available for the operator without operation. If you order the options after device purchase, please follow the procedure below: When you order an option, please supply your device code (see section 3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen page 146), NEXTREAM will return you a special 6-digit key (which is unique and can only be used for one device) and a sticker to stick on the device, To install the option, enter this key (see section 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen page 143). Note: It is necessary to close and open the {Technical Configuration} application when a new software option is installed. 100 Chapter 2 2.7 - Installing software options THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operation 101
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen .......................................................... 133 3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen............................................................ 134 3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen.................................................................. 135 3.8.8 - ALARM screen ............................................................................. 136 3.8.9 - OTHER screen............................................................................. 137 3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen................................................................. 137 3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen .............................................................. 138 3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen ............................................... 138 3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen.................................................. 139 3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen ................................................................. 141 3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen.................................................. 141 3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen............................................ 141 3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen.................................................. 143 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen................................................... 143 3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen.................................................... 146 3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen ..................................................... 148 47232437AK01 THOMSOM DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 103 3.1 - Operating principle 3.1 - OPERATING PRINCIPLE In stand-alone configuration, supervision is carried out from the front panel (described in this chapter) and from a PC terminal connected to the DBE 4110 by an Ethernet link and equipped with "Stand-alone" software supplied with the equipment (described in the following chapter) or Fast DSNG software (described in the chapter immediately afterwards). Front panel operation is designed to take into consideration the operating conditions of DSNG operators (Service Providers using the device for straightforward event coverage or the more complex occasional links). The following sections describe the control / command menu tree of the DSNG DBE 4110 encoder. Caution: When a parameter is changed by the supervision applications, the front panel display is not updated, it is necessary to validate the parameters. 104 Chapter 3 3.2 - Front panel overview THOMSOM DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.2 - FRONT PANEL OVERVIEW The front panel has two operating modes, supported by a specific software process, REMOTE and LOCAL. In REMOTE mode, only access to DBE 4110 state is available, and no changes may be made to operation. In LOCAL mode, the operator has full control over signal transmission and compression parameters. The mode changing procedure is explained in 3.4 - Ergonomy. The front panel has an LCD, five function keys and a set of 4 LEDs. DBE 4110 front panel MPEG-2 DBE 4110 DVB ESC ENT SHIFT 47232437AK01 THOMSOM DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 105 3.2 - Front panel overview LEDs The LEDs provide a visual indication of the operating state and/or settings of the equipment. They are interpreted as follows: Keypad LED COLOUR DESCRIPTION POWER green Device on UNIT FAIL red Prompt alarm preventing operation WARNING orange Deferred alarm not preventing operation or initialisation phase REMOTE green Remote mode selected and control/command session by a remote operating unit ESC ENT SHIFT 106 Chapter 3 3.2 - Front panel overview THOMSOM DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Key functions are as follows: Note: The SHIFT and ENT keys cannot be used to select the IP address. A beep sounds if the user makes keystroke errors or enters erroneous values: ENT: BEEP if the editing mode is not allowed. : BEEP if no previous choice. !: BEEP if no further choice. LCD presentation: The LCD features 4 lines of 40 characters each. First line: displays the menu level, when followed by "/" - displays the current sub-menu level and sub-menu of the parameters displayed below. when followed by ":" - current parameter value of associated menu item is displayed. Second line: displays various messages (blank, question, parameter, etc.). KEYS FUNCTION ESC Ignore modifications or go back to menu above Move cursor left, or upwards in a list ! Move cursor right or downwards in a list ENT Select item, increment alphanumeric value of a digit when bracketed and save changes SHIFT and ENT Select a digit, decrement alphanumeric value of the digit when bracketed ENT and or ! Enhance or reduce LCD contrast 47232437AK01 THOMSOM DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 107 3.2 - Front panel overview Third line: displays menu item or new value to be selected and entered Or, at sub-menu level, displays one item with its current value Fourth line: at menu level: menu item, using the SHIFT key and moving the cursor at sub-menu level: displays one item with its current value on editing page: context-sensitive help (e.g. parameter range) or error message Menu tree navigation and editing principle The symbols guide operation and the markers help to locate and/or select displayed items. SYMBOL INDICATION ........ selection cursor moved with left/right arrow keys selection pointer moved with left/right arrow keys to move up and down menus, then press ENT for editing menu fixed marker for upward extension of menu/parameter list fixed marker for downward extension of menu/parameter list 108 Chapter 3 3.3 - Welcome and main screens THOMSOM DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.3 - WELCOME AND MAIN SCREENS When the DBE 4110 is switched on, the following screen is displayed: This is followed by the main screens: - the start menu: The selection cursor ... moves with the and ! keys on the third and the fourth lines. Press the ENT key on the keypad to select the required command, then the relevant sub-menu is displayed. *** Basic system check . . . OK *** Bootstrap version 2.45 - 16-Dec-99 (32768 Kbytes DRAM installed) (c) 1999 - THOMSON BROADCAST SYSTEMS Figure 1: Welcome screen *** Autotest in progress *** / Root : Transmit Preset Mod.Setup Enc.O/P Encoding Scrambling Alarm Other Figure 2: Main screen 47232437AK01 THOMSOM DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 109 3.3 - Welcome and main screens - the default window: After a reboot, the LCD displays a default window, which gives the configuration parameters. Note: The default screen displays 0.032 Mb/s even if no video component is generated. The station name field directly refers to the service name. Press ESC to switch between the start menu and the default window. After 3 minutes without any action on the keypad, the start menu automatically goes back to the default window. There are several warning windows: when the operator wants to quit a screen without saving or wants to confirm saving. When "ALARM" flashes press ENT for direct access to the "Alarm" menu, then ESC to return to the initial state to correct the source of any alarms. / [station name] MOD OFF NON INVERTED 6.11132 Ms / s QPSK 3/4 204 PAL 420 0.032000 Mb / s ALARM A1 - OFF A2 - OFF IF 70.000 MHz FREE 110 Chapter 3 3.4 - Ergonomy THOMSOM DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.4 - ERGONOMY 3.4.1 - Operating mode The functions available on the front panel vary according to the type of connection which may be a LOCAL connection (both consult and modify operations are authorised) or a REMOTE connection (only consult mode is authorised). To change operating modes (to change from REMOTE mode to LOCAL mode or vice versa), proceed as follows: 1. Go to the start menu (press ESC). The LCD screen offers the following options 2. Press the ! or key, move the cursor to the Other field, then press the ENT key. The following screen appears: 3. Select the Tools field, then press the ENT key. / Root : Transmit Preset Mod.Setup Enc.O/P Encoding Scrambling Alarm Other Root / Other : Setup Monitor Tools Other / Tools : 47232437AK01 THOMSOM DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 111 3.4 - Ergonomy 4. The cursor will be on the CONTROL field, press ENT. The first line features the current value (in this case LOCAL mode). To change the value, click on the ! key. The choice of mode is LOCAL or REMOTE. Click on the ENT key. The following screen appears: For confirmation, press the ENT key. For cancellation, press the ESC key. Press the ESC key: Go back to the Control screen. Control Ip Address Reboot Option About Time Tools / Control : LOCAL Control : LOCAL Switch to local mode ARE YOU SURE? (ENT) = YES (ESC) = NO EXIT WITHOUT SAVING (ENT) = YES (ESC) = NO 112 Chapter 3 3.4 - Ergonomy THOMSOM DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.4.2 - Changing parameters ON AIR The encoder has a transmission interrupt/restore mechanism in the event of a parameter change On Air. If you edit essential transmission parameters On Air transmission is stopped. Information is displayed on the warning screen. 47232437AK01 THOMSOM DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 113 3.5 - External modulator connection 3.5 - EXTERNAL MODULATOR CONNECTION When an external modulator is connected, IF access is available and it is possible to control RF depending on the output modulator (IF, L, Ku, C). The possible level range is -35 to -5 dBm. 114 Chapter 3 3.6 - Menu tree THOMSOM DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.6 - MENU TREE The following page illustrates the menu tree with all the options. Chapter 3 115 3.6 - Menu tree 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual TOOLS TRANSMIT OTHER CONTROL IP ADDRESS REBOOT OPTION ABOUT TIME MAIN MOD.SETUP ENCODING PRESET ENC.O/P SCRAMBLING ALARM RECALL STORE ERASE L-BAND IF TX O/P SYMBOL_R INFO.BNDWDTH ROLL_OFF SPECTRUM VIDEO AUDIO DATA SETUP MONITOR ASI I/P S_ID FRAMING STATION NAME MSDL CONVOLUTION INPUT OUTPUT IF L-Band IF Freq Low Level Nom Level L-Band Low Level Nom Level Osc Band C/Ku Freq 116 Chapter 3 3.6 - Menu tree THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 117 3.7 - Sections associated with the menu 3.7 - SECTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH THE MENU 3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen 3.8.3 - PRESET screen 3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen 3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen 3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen 3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen 3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen 3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen 3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen 3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen 3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen 3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen 3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen 3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen 3.8.6 - ENCODING screen 3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen 3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen 3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen 3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen 3.8.8 - ALARM screen List of alarms 3.8.9 - OTHER screen 3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen 3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen 3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen 3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen 3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen 3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen 3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen 3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen 3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen 3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen 118 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.8 - DESCRIPTION OF THE MENU AND ASSOCIATED SCREENS 3.8.1 - Main screen When the cursor is placed on the last parameter Other, a beep is emitted. By pressing the right arrow key, the cursor goes back to the Transmit parameter. Otherwise, the left arrow key takes the cursor back to Alarm, Scrambling, etc. / Root : Transmit Preset Mod.Setup Enc.O/P Encoding Scrambling Alarm Other 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 119 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.2 - TRANSMIT screen In the main screen, select the TRANSMIT field and press the ENT key. The TRANSMIT menu appears: The TRANSMIT menu offers the option between CARRIER OFF, PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL, PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL and MODULATION ON by clicking with the right/left arrow key. Note: In the IF area between the selection cursor, only one value is displayed at a time, you can search within the list by pressing the right or left arrow keys as many times as necessary. For a PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL transmission, the range level is -25.0 to -5dBm in 0.5 steps. When PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL is selected, press ENT to set the low level then ENT to validate. For a PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL transmission, the range level is the same. When the MODULATION ON is selected, press ENT to adjust the nominal level, then ENT to validate. In any case, the values are updated in the Mod.Setup menu. Select the parameter in the IF area. The scrolling order is: CARRIER OFF, PURE CARRIER LOW LEVEL, PURE CARRIER NOM LEVEL, MODULATION ON. Press the ENT key. Caution: No operator acknowledgement is requested. Note: Whatever the modulator state is, before rebooting, it will be CARRIER OFF when the unit is switched on again. Transmit / IF: CARRIER OFF IF : CARRIER OFF The output is disabled 120 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.8.3 - PRESET screen In the main screen, select the PRESET field and press the ENT key. The menu offers the possibility of recalling configurations, storing new configurations and erasing configurations. 3.8.3.1 - PRESET / Recall screen In the PRESET screen, select the Recall field and press the ENT key. By clicking on the right arrow key, you can select the required configuration. Eight user configurations are available, plus 3 factory-installed configurations (A, B, C). All the characteristics of these configurations are described in the following table: Root / Preset : Recall Store Erase Preset / Recall : A : SNG-LBR B : SNG-HBR C : LBR+DATA 1 8 : configuration name_1 : configuration name_8 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 121 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens A B C SERVICE Service ID 100 100 100 PMT PID 257 257 257 PCR PID 100 100 100 Type Digital TV Service (1) Digital TV Service (1) Digital TV Service (1) Name TV TV TV Provider name None None None Scrambling Clear mode Clear mode Clear mode VIDEO Profile 4:2:0 MP@ML 4:2:2 P@ML 4:2:2 P@ML PID 100 100 100 Bit Rate 7.6Mbit/s 20Mbit/s 9Mbit/s Coding No low delay No low delay No low delay Source SDI SDI SDI Resolution 720x576 720x576 720x576 GOP 12 12 12 IP frame 3 3 3 Aspect ratio 4/3 4/3 4/3 AUDIO1&2 Input Analogue Analogue Analogue PID audio 1 110 110 110 PID audio 2 111 111 111 Bit rate 256kbit/s 384kbit/s 384kbit/s Mode Stereo Stereo Stereo Coding MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2 DATA PID Not used Not used 103 Baud rate Not used Not used 9600 Stream type Not used Not used 0x80 TRANSMISSION Symbol rate 6.111Ms/s 23.333Ms/s 6.666Ms/s Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK Code rate 3/4 7/8 7/8 Roll Off Auto Auto Auto Level -15dBm -15dBm -15dBm Output Off Air Off Air Off Air Spectral inversion Off Off Off Packet size 204 204 204 IF frequency 70MHz 70MHz 70MHz L-Band 1140.0MHz 1140.0MHz 1140.0MHz 122 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 All other parameters are not saved or recalled. Note: If the N41S422P option is not implemented, the predefined configuration "SNG-HBR" is not available. This is also the case with option N41SD56K - RS232 - regarding the LBR+DATA configuration. Select the required configuration and press the ENT key. 3.8.3.2 - PRESET / Store screen In the PRESET screen, select the Store field and press the ENT key. Press the ENT key. The following screen appears to enter the configuration name. The name of a new configuration is composed of 16 digits. The operator modifies digits one by one by pressing ENT to increment the value then moving the cursor with the right arrow key to go to the next character. Then place the cursor on the SAVE command and press the ENT key. Up to 8 user configurations can be stored. XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is an alphanumeric character string. The characters allowed are: A...Z and 0, 1...9 plus some other characters (-, :, blank). Preset / Store : 1 : configuration name 2 : configuration name 3 : configuration name Preset / Store/1 : NEW : X X X X X X X SAVE info: 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 123 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.3.3 - PRESET / Erase screen In the PRESET screen, select the Erase field and press the ENT key. Press ENT on the selected configuration to be removed, confirmation will be requested. Press ENT, configuration is acknowledged, then back to Preset menu. Press ESC, configuration is cancelled, then back to Preset menu. Note: It is not possible to erase preset configurations A, B and C. They are not displayed on this screen. Preset / Erase: 1 : configuration name 2 : configuration name 3 : configuration name ARE YOU SURE? (ENT) = YES (ESC) = NO 124 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.8.4 - MOD.SETUP screen In the main menu, select the Mod.Setup field and press the ENT key. The following screen appears: 3.8.4.1 - MOD.SETUP / Tx O/P screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Tx O/P field and press the ENT key. The current value is given on the first line. The Tx O/P area allows the operator to choose between the values IF and L-Band using the ! and keys, then by pressing ENT the new value is taken into account and the first line is updated. Root / Mod.Setup: Tx O/P : IF If : CARRIER OFF L-Band : UNUSED Convolution Symbol R Info Bndwdth Roll Off Spectrum : QPSK 7/8 : 06.666571 Ms/s : 08.99987 MHz : AUTOMATIC : NON INVERTED Mod.Setup /Tx O/P: IF Tx O/P: IF 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 125 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen In the Mod.Setup screen select the If field and press the ENT key. Press ENT. Press ENT to increment the value in the NEW field. The range is from 0-9. Press SAVE once the value has been obtained. No confirmation is requested. If the value requested falls outside the range specified on the fourth line info, the message "incorrect value" is displayed and no change is made. To change the Low Level or Nom Level parameter press ENT on the required option. The current level will be displayed on the first line and can be changed in 0.5 steps on line 3 using the ! (higher) and (lower) keys. The lowest possible value for both Low Level and Nom Level is -25.0 (max. 05.0 dBm). A beep sounds when an unauthorised value is requested. The two screens are as follows: Mod.Setup /If: IF Freq : 00070.000 MHz Low Level : -25.0 Nom Level : -10.0 IF / IF Freq: NEW : X X . X X X X X X Ms/s SAVE info : 50-180 MHz IF Low/Level: -25.0 Level: -25.0
126 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.8.4.3 - MOD.SETUP / L-Band screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the L-Band field and press the ENT key. F can be set in 1 kHz steps. The level range is: -20 dBm - +5.0 dBm. Press ENT. IF Nominal/Level: -10.0 Level: -10.0
Mod.Setup /L-Band: L-Band Freq : 1140.000 MHz Low Level : -25.0 Nom Level : -10.0 Osc. band Osc. value : none / c / ku : non / c / ku L-Band / L-Band Freq: NEW : X X . X X X X X X Ms/s SAVE info : 950-1750 MHz 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 127 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens For details on Low Level and Nom Level value editing, saving and ranges refer to section 3.8.4.2 - MOD.SETUP / If screen. 3.8.4.4 - MOD.SETUP / Convolution screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Convolution field and press the ENT key. The current value is given on the first line. The operator can choose between the different values in the following list, depending on modulator capabilities: QPSK 1/2, QPSK 2/3, QPSK 3/4, QPSK 5/6, QPSK 7/8, 8PSK 2/3, 8PSK 5/6, 8PSK 8/9, 16QAM3/4, 16QAM7/8, in compliance with EN 300421 standard "Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for 11/12GHz satellite services". The operator can tune the Convolution parameter by pressing the ! and keys. When the value is chosen, press ENT, the first line is updated. 3.8.4.5 - MOD.SETUP / Symbol_R screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Symbol_R field and press the ENT key. The digit to be modified is highlighted. The sign can be moved with the left and right arrow key. Mod.Setup / Convolution : QPSK 3/4 Convolution : QPSK 3/4 Mod.Setup / Symbol Rate : NEW : X X . X X X X X X Ms/s SAVE info : Max=16.000 Ms/s 128 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 To increment the digit value, press the ENT key until the required value has been reached. Constant pressing may speed up the process up to 3 characters per second. To save the new value, move the cursor to SAVE and press ENT. The current value is automatically updated. Should the operator press the ESC key after editing (even without pressing SAVE), a warning window is displayed. Case of choosing YES: no change occurs, the Mod.Setup is displayed. Case of choosing NO: The symbol-rate editing screen is displayed. Note: The Info/Bandwidth field is updated accordingly - as well as the encoder output bitrate audio and video rate on relevant control menus. 3.8.4.6 - MOD.SETUP / Info/Bandwidth screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Info/Bndwdth screen and press the ENT key. A beep is emitted and the screen remains unchanged: This screen is displayed for information. No editing is allowed. The bandwidth value is computed according to the Symbol_rate value and the relevant Roll_off factor. EXIT WITHOUT SAVING (ENT) = YES (ESC) = NO Root/Mod. Setup : Symbol R : 06.666571 Ms/s Info Bndwdth : 08.99987 MHz Roll Off : AUTOMATIC 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 129 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.4.7 - MOD.SETUP / Roll_off screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Roll_off field and press the ENT key. The Roll_off can be selected by pressing the ! and keys. The possible values are 26, 35 or AUTOMATIC. Press the ENT key to validate. Notes: The Info/Bandwidth value is internally computed according to the Symbol_rate and the Roll_off values. Roll-off values are in accordance with EN301210 standard "Digital Video Broadcast (DVB); Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for Digital Satellite News Gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite" QPSK + 35%, 8PSK + AUTO or 26% (default) or 35%, 16QAM + 26%. Mod.Setup / Roll Off : AUTOMATIC Roll Off: AUTOMATIC
130 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.8.4.8 - MOD.SETUP / Spectrum screen In the Mod.Setup screen, select the Spectrum field and press the ENT key. The possible values are INVERTED or NON INVERTED. 3.8.5 - ENC.O/P screen In the main menu, select the Enc.Output field and press the ENT key. This screen may be used for setting the output encoder frequency/TS rate. If a value above the max specified value is entered, the "incorrect value" message is displayed. If the hardware modulator option is set, this screen is available for information only. Mod.Setup / Spectrum : NON INVERTED Spectrum: NON INVERTED
Root / Enc.Output : NEW : X X . X X X X X X Mb/s SAVE info : Max=28.000 Mb/s 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 131 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.6 - ENCODING screen In the main screen, select the Encoding field and press the ENT key. The data and AMuSE items are displayed if related options are available in the device. Select the required component and press the ENT key. Or press ESC if no change and exit to previous menu level. 3.8.6.1 - ENCODING / Video screen In the Encoding screen, select the Video field and press the ENT key. Select the required parameter and press the ENT key. Root / Encoding : VID_1 AUD_1 AUD_2 SER_1 Encoding / Video Status : Enable Source: Digital serial 50Hz Profile: 420 MP@ML Rate / Auto: Vid_Rate: Latency: Resolution: PID: Yes 07.00000 Mb/s NORMAL - GOP 12/3 720X576 0100 132 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Note: For the Rate/Auto parameter, the default value is "YES". It should be set to "NO" if using the ASI TS input option (N41STSIN) or RS232 option (N41SD56K). Select ENT to validate your choice or select ESC to cancel changes. Parameters Available choices Status Enable or disable Source Digital serial 50Hz, Digital serial 60Hz, Pattern 50Hz, Pattern 60Hz, Composite PAL BDGHI, Composite SECAM, Composite NTSC-M 60Hz Profile 420MP@ML or 422P@ML (option) Rate / Auto Yes or No Vid_rate from 0.5 to 15Mb/s in MP@ML from 0.5 to 50Mb/s in 422P@ML Latency Normal - GOP 12/3, Normal - GOP 15/3, Low - GOP 12/1, Low - GOP 8/1, Ultra low (I frame, only) Resolution 720x576, 704x576, 544x576, 480x576, 352x576, 352x288 PID Within the range 32 - 8190 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 133 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.6.2 - ENCODING / Audio screen In the ENCODING screen, select the Audio field (e.g. AUD_1 or AUD_2) then press the ENT key. Encoding / Audio1/2: Status : Enable Source : Analog Mode / Rate : Stereo 256kbits Headroom Alignment Pid : 20 dB : 4 dBu : 0110 Parameters Available choices Status Enable or disable Source Analog, Tone, Unbalanced, Balanced, SDI Mode / Rate Mono 64, 96, 128 Kbits Dual 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits Stereo 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits Joint 128, 192, 256, 384 Kbits Headroom 8 - 20 dB, in 1dB steps Alignment 0 - 4 dBu, in 1dBu steps PID Within the range 32 - 8190 134 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Note: Mode / Rate modification automatically causes Video_rate adjustment. The Headroom and Alignment parameters can be changed if the analog audio is selected. 3.8.6.3 - ENCODING / Data screen In the ENCODING screen, select the Data field (e.g. SER_1) and press the ENT key. There is only one screen for the data parameters. This screen is proposed if the Data injection option (N41SD56K) is enabled. Encoding / Data / Status : Enable Transfer : 9600 PID : 0103 Parameters Available choices Status Enable or disable Transfer 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 bauds PID Within the range 0 - 8190, excluding PCR, video, audio PIDs used in the locally generated service. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 135 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.7 - SCRAMBLING screen In the main menu, select the Scrambling field and press the ENT key. This mode is in compliance with the BISS standard set out in the reference document EBU / Tech.3290 "Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS)". Press ENT. If no Mode_1 is active, the current mode value is NONE. To modify the Session word, the Status must be set to "enable" and the DVB Scrambling/BISS option must be declared. Root / Scrambling : BISS MODE_1 Scrambling / Mode 1 : Status : Disable Session word: 15.34.56.23.45.67 136 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3.8.8 - ALARM screen In the main menu, select the ALARM screen and press the ENT key. A distinction is made between prompt and deferred alarms. You can move up and down the alarm list with the left and right arrow keys. - first line: number of alarms - second line: only one alarm is described in the screen. This line gives the number of one alarm. - third line: the cause of the alarm. - fourth line: the following alarm. Note: Should an alarm occur, "ALARM" flashes in the default window. ALARM / 5 Alarms : 17 / 519 [SSEB / AUD2] : right signal under -65dBFS 34 / 0 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 137 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.9 - OTHER screen In the main menu, select the Other field and press the ENT key. 3.8.9.1 - OTHER / Setup screen In the Other screen, select the Setup field and press the ENT key. ASI input: If this parameter is enabled, it is no longer possible to auto-adjust the video rate on the remultiplexing unit. Root / Other : Setup Monitor Tools Other / Setup : Asi I/P S Id Framing Station Name Msdl Parameters Available choices ASI Input Disable or enable S-Id Service name and PID (5 digits) Framing 188 or 204 Station name 8 digits Msdl disabled (beep) 138 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Station name: The parameter is sent in the TSDT table. The name is also displayed on the front panel at upper menu level. It is mapped into the service name. Framing: When changing MPEG framing, the Symbol_rate is not affected, but the relevant output clock rate is computed. 3.8.9.2 - OTHER / Monitor screen In the Other screen, select the Monitor field and press the ENT key. This consultation menu indicates the bitrate, the source and the mode for each output video and audio component. 3.8.9.2.1 - OTHER / Monitor / Output screen Select the Output field, then press ENT to obtain the services of the TS output. Press ENT to get the components of the selected service. CONTEXT: Output Input (ENT) : Output signal CONTEXT:/Output / Output flow : 4136 kb/s TV: 100 Service flow : 4639kb/s 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 139 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.9.2.2 - OTHER / Monitor / Input screen The service is visible when ASI I/P is "enabled". In addition PID conflict management is supported. Go back to the MONITOR screen, then select the Input field. Press ENT to get the services of the selected TS input. Press ENT to get the components of the selected service. CONTEXT:/Output / TV : 100 Service flow (TV : 100) : 4639kb/s AUD:110 AUD :111 VID:100 SER:768 Component flow : 4107kb/s CONTEXT:/Input / IN1 (ENT) : Input services CONTEXT:/Input / IN1 COD3: TV41 COD3: TV42 Service flow : 406 kb/s 140 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 CONTEXT: /. . . /Input / IN1 / COD3 TV41 Service flow (TV : 100) : 583 kb/s VID:1000 AUD :1001 AUD : 1002 Component flow : 204 kb/s 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 141 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.9.3 - OTHER / Tools screen In the Other screen, select the Tools field and press the ENT key. 3.8.9.3.1 - OTHER / Tools / Control screen The Control menu is already described in section 3.4 - Ergonomy. 3.8.9.3.2 - OTHER / Tools / IP Address screen The IP address defines the device address for the control&command network. This TCP/IP protocol network is connected via the Ethernet connector on the device rear panel. In Local mode, it is possible to change the IP Address, IP Netmask and IP Gateway via the encoder front panel. In the Tools screen, select the field to be changed and press ENT. Example: changing the IP address: Once you have selected IP Address: Other / Tools : Control Ip Address Reboot Option About Time Tools / IP Address: IP Address IP Netmask IP Gateway 142 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Each digit is changed individually. After rebooting, the device takes this new address into account. The IP address and IP netmask or default gateway parameters can also be changed using the {Telnet} application. See section Commands available with the Telnet application page 390 Figure 3: Modification of Addresses IP Address / IP Address : NEW : 172.016.010.185 SAVE info : IP Address 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 143 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens 3.8.9.3.4 - OTHER / Tools / Reboot screen In the Tools screen, select the Reboot field and press the ENT key. When rebooting the device, 3 options are available: No Autotest, Short Autotest or Long Autotest. Note: After rebooting the device, it automatically recovers the previous active configuration and remains in the previous control mode (local or remote). 3.8.9.3.5 - OTHER / Tools / Option screen In the Tools screen, select the Option field and press the ENT key. " In the Option screen, select the Software field and press the ENT key. Tools / Reboot : No Autotest Reboot : No Autotest Tools / Option : Software Hardware Option / Software : 00 Low Dl : Enable 01 VBI Pr : Enable 02 Ext. Mod : Disable 144 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The available options are given in the table below: For example for the first option "Low delay", in the NEW area the operator must enter the specific key for this option. Note: The specific key is supplied by NEXTREAM Caution: When an option is already declared, the previous screen is displayed with the value 00.00. If the operator validates the SAVE command, the option is disabled. Enter the specific key, Place the cursor on the SAVE field. Press ENT. The following screen is displayed. Option number Option name 00 Low delay 01 VBI processing 02 External modulator 03 Data injection RS232 04 TS input 05 DVB scrambling / BISS 06 422P@ML Option / 04 - TS Inp: NEW : 00.00 SAVE info : TS input processing 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 145 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens " In the Option screen, select the Hardware field and press the ENT key. All the hardware options available with their slot allocation are given in the table below: Place the cursor on the required slot and press ENT. will be active only after next reboot Option / Hardware : Slot 1 : DPSN Slot 2 : ISMB Slot 3 : ALARM RELAY Slot allocation Available choices 0 SSEB 1 DPSN, COMPIN, AMuSE AC3 MPEG, NONE 2 ISMB, AMuSE AC3 MPEG, NONE 3 Alarm Relay Closure, NONE 4 ATADI, NONE Option / SLOT 2 : ISMB SLOT 2: ISMB 146 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The operator can press the right arrow key in the SLOT 2 area between the selection cursors to choose between ISMB, AMuSE AC3 MPEG and NONE. When the choice is made, press ENT and the following screen appears: 3.8.9.3.6 - OTHER / Tools / About screen In the Tools screen, select the About field and press the ENT key. " In the About screen, select the Autotest field and press the ENT key. The following screen appears for 2 seconds: will be active only after next reboot CONTEXT : / Autotest Information Connections (ENT) : Autotest report CONTEXT : / Autotest Autotest OK 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 147 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens " In the About screen, select the Information field and press the ENT key. This menu comprises 4 screens: First screen: Software version and IP address Second screen: Licensed software options Third screen: Licensed hardware options Fourth screen: Equipment code used to obtain new software options CONTEXT : / Information Type : SSE IP Address : 172.16.10.175 TES: 99.41 SSB: 2.0.6.4 ISP :9 Hdw: 4 50Hz Scrambler : ALL PRESS ENT CONTEXT : / Information -- OPTIONS LIST -- 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 N41SLODE : Low delay CONTEXT : / Information Slot 1 : DPSN Slot 2 : ISMB MODUL Firmware 2.30 CONTEXT : / Information Equipment code : 0XCE1C Serial number : 16831237AA/01004 AUD10:600 AUD11:600 AUD20:600 AUD21:600 148 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Note: The equipment code is required for licence code generation to enable software options. " In the About screen, select the Connections field and press the ENT key. 3.8.9.3.7 - OTHER / Tools / Time screen In the Tools screen, select the Time field and press the ENT key. The Time field indicates the current date and time. In LOCAL mode, the user can modify the date by pressing the ENT key. The third and fourth lines are modified and the following screen appears: CONTEXT : / Connections -- CONNECTIONS LIST -- PC : INFO PC : EVT PC : INFO [PC name] CONTEXT : / Time (Y/M/D H:M:S) : time (ENT) : Time set CONTEXT : / Time (Y/M/D H:M:S) : time + YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Rec (ENT) : change increment mode 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 3 149 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens Field definitions and adjustment ranges The first field can take the values "+" (increase) or "-" (decrease). The YYYY (year) field ranges between 1900 and 2107. The MM (month) field ranges between 1 and 12. The DD (day) field ranges between 1 and 31. The HH (hour) field ranges between 0 and 23. The MM (minutes) field ranges between 0 and 59. The SS (seconds) field ranges between 0 and 59. The Rec (update) field records the current timer values. Operating mode To increase (or decrease) a field value, firstly check that there is a + sign (or - sign) in the first field (if not, select the first field and press ENT). Then, select the field to be adjusted. Finally, press ENT as many times as necessary to get the required value. Once the new time has been programmed, select the Rec field and press ENT to confirm. If the time can be set (LOCAL mode), the previous menu then reappears. In REMOTE mode, the system emits a beep. Note: The time to be entered is the local time. The offset between local and UTC time may be set by a remote PC station. This time can be updated either by the front panel or by the receiving of a broadcast message from GALET software (UTC Time Broadcaster) or by TDT. The default value is set to +2h00 (i.e. local time = UTC time + 2h00). 150 Chapter 3 3.8 - Description of the menu and associated screens THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software 151
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.1.5 - Scrambler item.......................................................................... 200 4.5.3.1.6 - SAM card item .......................................................................... 201 4.5.3.1.7 - Access control item................................................................... 202 4.5.3.1.8 - SIMS item ................................................................................. 203 4.5.3.1.9 - Time item.................................................................................. 204 4.5.3.1.10 - TBS Signalling item................................................................. 206 4.5.3.1.11 - ISO Signalling item................................................................. 208 4.5.3.1.12 - DVB Signalling item................................................................ 209 4.5.3.1.13 - PSIP Signalling item............................................................... 211 4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters .................................................................. 212 4.5.3.3 - NIT table....................................................................................... 215 4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT ................................................................................. 215 4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors .................................................................. 219 4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors..................................................................... 219 4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT.................................................................. 220 4.5.3.4 - TOT table...................................................................................... 223 4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT................................................................................ 223 4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors .................................................................. 227 4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors..................................................................... 227 4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration......................................... 228 4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations ................................................................ 230 4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes ..................................................... 235 4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking ............................................................ 237 4.5.4 - Generated Services...................................................................... 238 4.5.4.1 - TV service..................................................................................... 239 4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component................................ 243 4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component................................ 255 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component................................... 264 4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component ................................. 271 4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors .......................................................................... 283 4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors........................................................................... 289 4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions..................................................................... 290 4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components .................................................................... 290 4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components ...................................................................... 291 4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command......................................................................... 293 4.5.5 - TS input ........................................................................................ 293 4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input ........................ 298 4.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, selecting services and EMM flows ...................................................... 298 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary................................. 298 4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services ................................................................... 303 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows............................................................... 306 4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services ...................... 309 4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions.......................................................... 309 4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components................................................ 312 4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components................................................................. 316 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software 153
4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service .................................................................... 321 4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components ............. 322 4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions ......................................................... 322 4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component .............................................................. 324 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application......................................... 326 4.6.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 326 4.6.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 327 4.6.3 - Alarm supervision ......................................................................... 334 4.6.3.1 - Alarms window............................................................................. 334 4.6.3.2 - Equipment window....................................................................... 338 4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow .......................................... 340 4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands......................................................... 343 4.6.6 - Maintenance commands............................................................... 344 4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms ............................................................ 350 4.7 - {Download} application .................................................................... 351 4.7.1 - Purpose and scope of the application........................................... 351 4.7.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 351 4.7.3 - Procedure ..................................................................................... 353 4.7.3.1 - Before downloading ..................................................................... 353 4.7.3.2 - Downloading ................................................................................ 358 4.7.3.3 - After downloading ........................................................................ 359 4.7.4 - Additional commands ................................................................... 360 4.8 - {Event Log} application .................................................................... 362 4.8.1 - Principles of the {Event Log} application ...................................... 362 4.8.1.1 - Event ............................................................................................ 362 4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions ........................................................ 363 4.8.1.3 - Event exporting............................................................................ 363 4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous .............................................................................. 364 4.8.2 - Screen layout................................................................................ 364 4.8.3 - Commands ................................................................................... 368 4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file ..................................... 368 4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format.......................................... 369 4.8.3.3 - Display commands....................................................................... 371 4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands................................................................. 376 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application.................................................................... 379 4.9.1 - Scope............................................................................................ 379 4.9.2 - Features........................................................................................ 379 4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms.................................................... 379 154 Chapter 4 - PC operation - Control & Command software
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.9.2.2 - Print capability .............................................................................. 380 4.9.2.3 - Search engine .............................................................................. 380 4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool.............................................................................. 380 4.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {Event Log} applications................................................................ 380 4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications ....................................... 380 4.9.2.7 - User defined comments................................................................ 380 4.9.2.8 - French/English versions ............................................................... 381 4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display............................................................... 381 4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms .................................................................... 381 4.9.2.11 - Help / About................................................................................ 381 4.9.3 - Access to the {Alarm help} application......................................... 382 4.9.3.1 - Access via the {Monitoring &Redundancy} application ................ 382 4.9.3.2 - Access via the {Event Log} application......................................... 382 4.9.3.3 - Access via any application ........................................................... 383 4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) ............................. 384 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application ......................... 390 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application....................................................... 390 4.10.2 - IP Settings .................................................................................. 396 4.10.3 - Parameter definitions ................................................................. 397 4.10.3.1 - Video bidir................................................................................... 397 4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type....................................................................... 397 4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset ................................................................................. 398 4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode ................................. 398 4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type.......................................................................... 398 4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode....................................................................... 398 4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode.............................................................................. 399 4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode.................................................................. 399 4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift.......................................................................... 400 4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type ................................................................. 401 4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284)............................................ 401 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 155 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects 4.1 - ERGONOMIC ASPECTS 4.1.1 - Screen The screen displays: a title, a menu bar, a tool bar, a main window, a status bar. When you declare the services and components, you will display the following screen: Foreword Some commands cannot be directly accessed using the DBS 2930 operating software, however some of them are described in this chapter. These are notably the commands that can be accessed using the {Telnet} application as described in the section Commands available with the Telnet application page 390. 156 Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.1: Example of screen Title The title displays the application name. Menu bar The menu bar provides access to various functions that can be selected via pull- down menus activated with a left mouse click: quit the session (Quit menu); confirm, cancel or test changes (Edit menu); lock/unlock and save functions (Tool menu); display the software release or access the on-line User Manual (Help menu). menu bar tool bar main window status bar 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 157 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects Tool bar The first three buttons provide quick access to the most frequently used functions in the menu bar: quit the application (
button
equivalent to the Quit control of the menu bar), cancel a change ( button equivalent to the Edit/Cancel control of the menu bar), confirm a change (
button
equivalent to the Edit/Validate control of the menu bar). The fourth and fifth buttons ( and ) are used to lock or unlock the operating station. 158 Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Main window Information appearing in this area is specific to each application as regards content and formatting (tree structure, icon representation, divisions of the main window). A tree structure display function (+/- sign) is available in all applications. +: lower level tree structure not displayed. -: lower level tree structure displayed. without sign: indicates no lower level exists. To display or remove display of the lower level tree structure, double-click on the line featuring the "+" or "-" sign or click once on the "+" or "-" sign. Figure 4.2: Example of main window with lower level displayed Figure 4.3: Example of main window with lower level not displayed 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 159 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects When the configuration is active, the status bar displays Active configuration. Otherwise, the Edited configuration message replaces Active configuration. A pencil indicates the inconsistency between the information displayed and the real configuration. The icon will appear each time the operator edits a configuration. The pencil disappears when the operator validates the configuration (click on the
button, the Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar or the Validate modifications... command in the shortcut menu related to the device in some applications) or cancels the changes (click on the button, the Edit/Cancel... command in the menu bar or the Cancel modifications... command in the shortcut menu related to the device in some applications). Status bar The status bar provides context-sensitive help, which is general information the user may require at any time. It is situated at the bottom of the main window. 4.1.2 - Mouse The left mouse button is used to select an object. The right mouse button displays a shortcut menu showing all the possible actions for this object. Figure 4.4: Using the mouse (e.g. for encoder configuration) Left mouse button (selecting an object) Right mouse button (displaying shortcut menu) 160 Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language In all applications except the {Equipment Interface} application, the language used for the interface can be selected in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings application). Screens are available in French (for French-speaking countries) or English. , ,, , Procedure 1. In the Start menu, select Settings, then Control Panel. 2. Click on the Regional Settings icon. 3. In the first tab in this window, choose the interface language: French (Standard) or English (United Kingdom). Notes: - The language of the {Alarm Help} application cannot be set. It corresponds to the language chosen in the Windows Control Panel (Regional Settings application) during installation of the DBS 2930 STAND ALONE software. - The chosen language is only acknowledged on application startup. When changing languages, rerun any open applications. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 161 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects Figure 4.5: Regional Settings (Windows NT) or Regional Options (Windows 2000) 162 Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.1.4 - On-line manuals A command is available on the menu bar of the applications for rapid access to the on-line versions of the user manuals installed on the PC. This command, located in the Help menu (Help/Operating manual...), displays the list of .pdf documents located in a default directory. The default directory can be changed by clicking on Browse... When you double-click on a document, ACROBAT READER is run as required, loading the .pdf file corresponding to the selected manual. If you do not have ACROBAT READER, you can install it from the Documenta- tion CD via the Get Acrobat Reader button. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 163 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects 4.1.5 - Simulator mode This mode is used to simulate the device. When it is activated, the application does not transmit anything to the device but simulates the same operation without error. Therefore, no alarm is raised and all validations are acknowledged. 4.1.5.1 - Activation of simulator mode , ,, , Procedure From the {Equipment Installation} application: 1. Select the PC icon in the main window; 2. Select the Edit parameters... command; Figure 4.6: Activation of Simulator mode 3. Click on the Simulator Enabled button; 4. Click on OK; 5. Rerun the {Equipment Interface} application for the parameter to be acknowledged. 164 Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.1.5.2 - Simulation of options The presence or absence of options for a device is managed by the {Equipment Installation} application. Simulator mode must be activated beforehand (see previous section). , ,, , Procedure to simulate the presence of options From the {Equipment Installation} application: 1. Select the device; 2. Select the Edit parameters... option in the shortcut menu (right mouse click); 3. Select the Simulator tab; Figure 4.7: Presence of options to simulate 4. Click on the options to simulate; 5. Click on OK; 6. Rerun the {Equipment Interface} application for this parameter to be acknowledged. Note: This information is saved in the servex.ini file located in the installation directory. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 165 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking The lock/unlock function guarantees coherent operation when several stations are being used to operate the device. It is not necessary to lock or even validate when installing or removing a device. These specific operations are immediately acknowledged by the other applications. Subsequent changes can also be made without locking the connection. These are indicated by the pencil icon and the Edited configuration message in the status bar as shown in the figure below: Figure 4.8: Edited configuration The changes in progress are not necessarily lost during connection locking. The user can choose to save them. Click on , select the Lock device command in the shortcut menu or Tool/Lock all... in the menu bar to display the following dialogue box: Figure 4.9: "Lock and lose changes?" confirmation request 166 Chapter 4 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 To show whether an application is locked or not, the background colour of the main window is white when it is locked and grey otherwise. Figure 4.10: View of the window when the application is locked Figure 4.11: View of the window when the application is unlocked 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 167 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects Note: The following screen is displayed when the Ethernet link is not properly connected (disconnected or the equipment is switched off). Figure 4.12: Availability of the application 168 Chapter 4 4.2 - Running software THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.2 - RUNNING SOFTWARE After starting the WINDOWS session on the operating station PC and opening the directory which contains the Stand-Alone applications, the following display appears: Figure 4.13: Icon display The icons represent the different "Stand-Alone" software applications. The software must be run in the following order: 1. Start the operating session by activating the {Equipment Interface} application by double-clicking on the icon. Notes: 1. To shut down a session, close this application after first closing all other applications. 2. It is recommended to leave this application open as long as the device is being used, even if no other application has been run. 2. Declare the device via the {Equipment Installation} application. This step is unnecessary if the device has already been declared in a previous session. 3. Set the technical configuration for the device (operating parameters, signalling table editing, service creation) from the {Technical Configuration} application. 4. Start the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application to monitor the device. 5. Start the {Download} application to download embedded software. 6. Start the {Event Log} application to view events occurring on the encoder (alarms, reboot, etc.). 7. Start the {Alarm Help} application to understand the meaning of alarms occurring on the encoder. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 169 4.2 - Running software Notes: 1. The {Download Embedded Software} application is used by NEXTREAM for downloading embedded software. 2. The {ATM Connect Management} application does not concern the DBE 4110 Encoder. 170 Chapter 4 4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.3 - {EQUIPMENT INTERFACE} APPLICATION Foreword: The {Equipment Interface} application handles communication with the device operated from the PC and operations carried out as background tasks (e.g. alarm collection). It is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe) before using any other operating software applications and to remain active as long as the device is operated even if no application is active. Otherwise, an error message appears: Figure 4.14: Error message when the connection with {Interface Equipements} is not established If the {Equipment Interface} application is activated after another one, the connection with the application is automatically open. This application do not propose any operation command. It is recommended to close all the applications before leaving the {Equipment Interface} application. Otherwise the following dialogue box appears: Figure 4.15: Confirmation before leaving the {Interface Equipements} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 171 4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application Screen layout Figure 4.16: Screen tool bar main window secondary window menu bar 172 Chapter 4 4.3 - {Equipment Interface} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Menu bar Tool bar Main window Reserved. Secondary window This window gives the list of open applications. Menu Command Comment File Exit Quit the application. Help About... Details of software version. Button Comment Shows application activity. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 173 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application 4.4 - {EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION} APPLICATION Foreword: It is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe) before starting the {Equipment Installation} application, see note in section 4.3 - page 170 and to remain the {Equipment Interface} application active as long as the device is operated, even if no application is active. It is not necessary to lock the application (or validate) to de-install or install a device. The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available in French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language page 160). 4.4.1 - Purpose and scope of the application The main function of the {Equipment Installation} application is declaring the device. This condition is essential for the device to be configured and supervised from other software applications. The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions offered by the application. section 4.4.2 Screen layout section 4.4.3 Declaring the device section 4.4.4 Cancelling/validating device installation changes section 4.4.5 Additional device installation commands: . Remove a device, . Change device name and address. 174 Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.4.2 - Screen layout Figure 4.17: Screen Menu bar Menu Command Comment Quit Quit the application. Edit Cancel... Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration). Validate... Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved, it becomes the active configuration. Tool Lock all... Lock all device connections (this command has the same effect as the shortcut Lock device command in Stand-Alone opera- tion), see section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165 for details. Unlock all... Unlock all device connections (this command has the same effect as the shortcut Unlock device command in Stand-Alone operation), see section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165 for details. Help About... Details about software version. Operating manual... Open on-line user manuals. see section 4.1.4 - On-line manuals page 162 for details. menu bar tool bar main window 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 175 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application Tool bar Main window When the application is started up, a list of devices is displayed. This list takes the form of a two-level tree structure and each line is preceded by an icon which facilitates identification of the different device types: level 1, at the top of the list, features the PC element which is unique and represents the operating PC, level 2 features the encoder directly operated by the PC through the Ethernet link. 4.4.3 - Declaring the device When the application is activated, the main window contains just the icon of the PC if it is the first time it is being used, or the tree structure of the last saved configuration. If the previous representation is not suitable, it should be deleted (see section 4.4.5.1 - Remove a device page 181) or modified (see section 4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address page 181). Note: The IP address of the device must be entered beforehand using the appropriate command on the front panel (menu: Other/Tools/IP Address). Button Comment Quit the application. Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active con- figuration). Confirm changes. The configuration is saved. Lock the terminal for the current application. The main window background is white. Unlock the terminal for the current application. The main window back- ground is grey. 176 Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.18: Main window in the absence of a previous declaration , ,, , Procedure for declaring the device 1. Select the icon representing the PC. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing PC-specific commands. 3. Choose the Add a device... command. A first dialogue box then opens. Add a device... Edit parameters... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 177 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application Figure 4.19: Device parameter fields (type) 4. Select the Digital Broadcast Encoder type and the device model DBE 4110 (DSNG). 5. Click on Next >. A second dialogue box is displayed. Figure 4.20: Device parameter fields (address) 178 Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 6. Enter the devices name and IP address. The device name will be used by the other applications. 7. Click on Finish. The declared device appears in the tree structure with the following information: name, IP address. Figure 4.21: Main window after declaring the device Note: The Stand-Alone Control & Command software supplied with the DBE 4110 only allows installation of one DBE 4110. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 179 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application 4.4.4 - Cancelling/validating device installation changes 4.4.4.1 - Cancelling changes to device installation , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the pull-down Edit menu in the menu bar. Figure 4.22: Command for cancelling changes 2. Choose the Cancel... command. A dialogue box is then available to confirm that you wish to cancel the changes. Figure 4.23: Confirmation request 3. Click on OK. After confirmation, the command is executed and the display reflects the devices active configuration. Note: The
button
achieves the same effect. 180 Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.4.4.2 - Validating changes to device installation Configuration changes are only effective when validated. , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the pull-down Edit menu in the menu bar. Figure 4.24: Command for validating changes 2. Choose the Validate... command. A dialogue box is then available to confirm changes. Figure 4.25: Confirmation request 3. Click on OK. After confirmation, the command is executed and the display reflects the devices active configuration. The lower right-hand edge of the main window now displays the words "Active configuration" and the pencil icon next to the device has disappeared. Note: The
button
achieves the same effect. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 181 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application 4.4.5 - Additional device installation commands 4.4.5.1 - Remove a device The command for removing the device is used to cancel declaration of that device. , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the device in the tree structure. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Remove command. 4.4.5.2 - Change device name and address This command uses the dialogue box used for device declaration. , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the device in the tree structure. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Edit parameters... command. Edit parameters... Remove Lock device Unlock device Edit parameters... Remove Lock device Unlock device 182 Chapter 4 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.26: Edit device parameters dialogue box (1/2) Note: The IP address cannot be modified from this dialogue box. To change the IP address it is necessary to de-install, then re-install the device (see section 4.4.3 - Declaring the device page 175) with the new address. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 183 4.4 - {Equipment Installation} application The second screen indicates the type of encoder used. Figure 4.27: Edit device parameters dialogue box (2/2) 184 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5 - {TECHNICAL CONFIGURATION} APPLICATION Foreword: Before starting the {Technical Configuration} application, it is recommended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe), see note in section 4.3 - page 170. It is recommended to activate this application before using any other operating software applications. To modify parameters in the application, do not forget to lock the terminal for the current application ( ). The commands are then accessible. The main window background is white. The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available in French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language). 4.5.1 - Purpose and scope of the application The main configuration functions of a DBE 4110 single-service encoder available to the user are as follows: edit the parameters of the operated device: output frequency, TS packet size, etc.; declare standard TV, radio, VBI services; edit video component, audio components, teletext component, private data components; edit Network Information Table (NIT); edit Time Offset Table (TOT); edit descriptors in the PMT and SDT tables; edit filtering conditions on the TS Input for remultiplexing. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 185 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application IMPORTANT: In the {Technical Configuration} application, TS bitrates are maximum estimated values used to check that the output multiplex rate is high enough to transmit all the components. Estimated TS bitrates may be slightly higher than the measured ones displayed in the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application, e.g. an estimated 417kbit/s component will be measured at around 407kbit/s. The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions available with the application. section 4.5.2 Screen layout section 4.5.3 Device parameters . Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters), . Modulator parameters, . NIT table, . TOT table, . Saving/Loading a device configuration . Archived configurations, . Cancelling/Validating changes, . Device locking / unlocking section 4.5.4 Generated Services . TV service, . Editing parameters of the video component, . Editing parameters of the audio component, . Editing parameters of the VBI component, . Editing parameters of the data component, . PMT descriptors, . SDT descriptors, . Advanced Functions, . Shared components, . Ghost components, . Inband command. section 4.5.5 TS input . First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input (level 2) . Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, select- ing services and EMM flows (level 3) . Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services (level 4) . Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components (level 5) 186 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.2 - Screen layout Figure 4.28: Screen Menu bar Menu Command Comment Quit Quit the application. Edit Cancel... Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration). Validate... Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved; it becomes the active configuration. Tool Lock all... Lock the device (configuration commands are accessible). See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details. Unlock all... Unlock the device (configuration commands are not accessi- ble). See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details. Save all... Save your configurations to file (see following note). Help About... Information about software version. Operating manual... Open on-line user manual. See section 4.1.4 - On-line manuals for details. Level 1 Level 2 Level 4 menu bar tool bar main window Level 3 Level 2 Level 3 Level 5 Level 4 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 187 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Note concerning the "Save all" command: This function is used to back up the active configuration of operated devices. The created files can then be reloaded from the {Technical Configuration} application. When the Save all... command is selected in the menu bar, the following dialogue box is displayed for you to define the path to the folder where you want to save your configuration along with any associated comment which will feature in the header of each file. The Browse... button is available for you to select the file location. The program automatically creates a folder, which takes the name of the device, in which configuration files will be saved. The file name always consists of "technical" plus the user-defined suffix (e.g. technical_001.mcf). There is no point in adding an extension as the .mcf extension is added by default. When you have entered the fields, click on OK to confirm and then validate ( button or Edit/Validate... in the menu bar). Root Path Root Path is the root directory. The Browse... button is used for selecting another directory from the list of available directories. If the directory entered does not exist, the command fails. Suffix Suffix is the text attached to the file name. Do not add the _ character as it will be added automatically. Comment Comment placed in each file. It is displayed on file retrieval. 188 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Tool bar Main window A three level tree view shows the encoder which was pre-installed via the {Equipment Installation} application. level 1, at the top of the list, represents the encoder, level 2 represents - a "Generated Services" item that groups together all the services generated locally by the encoder. Under this item are represented: . at level 3: the generated services with indication of their type (TV service, radio service, etc.) and their names, . at level 4: the components with indication of their type (video, audio, VBI, data), their PIDs, their physical sources (board and connector) and their programmed rates. - the "Tributary" or TS item. Under this item are represented: . at level 3: the input TS, . at level 4: the filtered services of the input TS, . at level 5: the filtered components of the filtered services from the input TS and also the attached components (local data component atta- ched to an incoming TS service). Button Comment Quit the application. Cancel changes and display the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration). Confirm changes. The edited configuration is saved; it becomes the active configuration. Lock the terminal for the current application. The commands are accessible. The main window background is white. Unlock the terminal for the current application. The commands are not accessible (only consultation is possible). The main window background is grey. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 189 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3 - Device parameters 4.5.3.1 - Encoder operating parameters (advanced parameters) The application has an Edit advanced parameters... command for displaying and editing the parameters related to general operation of the device. , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the device; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands; 3. Choose the Edit advanced parameters... command. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 190 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.29: Device configuration dialogue box Owing to the number of parameters, they are grouped into Items. The left-hand part of the dialogue box displays the list of items. Selecting an item displays the associated parameters in the right-hand part of the dialogue box. The OK button confirms the content of all the pages, the Cancel button undoes the changes. Caution: 1. Certain parameters correspond to device sizing. These sizing parameters are used by the device to allocate memory space on device initialisation. If the parameter setting is wrong, more memory may be required than is available. In this event, the device cannot be started up. This is indicated on the front panel of the device. 2. Changes are only effective after validation ( button or Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar) or, for a number of parameters marked by the symbol, after rebooting the device. parameters for item currently selected in the list of items list of items 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 191 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application A prompt is then automatically displayed: Figure 4.30: Reboot dialogue box Select the device (a tick should be displayed in front of the device name) then click on OK. Figure 4.31: Reboot command 192 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.1.1 - General item Figure 4.32: General parameters Purpose: configure the output signal. In the Signalling mode area ISO Only ISO/MPEG2 tables (PAT, PMT, CAT) are sent in the outgoing signal (in compliance with the MPEG2 ISO 13818-1: Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio: Systems standard). ISO (with NIT in PAT) If DVB SI signalling is injected by an external device, the encoder generates MPEG2 tables (PAT, PMT, CAT) with mention of the NIT (PID = 16 in decimal) in the PAT. PSIP terrestrial Reserved for ATSC. If selected, a PSIP Signalling item replaces DVB Signalling in the left-hand Items list. PSIP cable Reserved for ATSC. Same remark as for PSIP terrestrial above. DVB The device also generates and transmits DVB tables (NIT, SDT, EIT, TDT, TOT). Without signalling The device transmits no signalling. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 193 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application In the Frequency Area area 50 Hz / 60 Hz The commands in certain dialogue boxes depend on the chosen standard: video source PAL/SECAM or NTSC if presence of the DPSN or COMPIN board, video resolution, etc. In the Alarm relay area Alarm relay triggers on major alarms The alarm relay on the MDSL board is activated by major alarms. Alarm relay triggers on major or minor alarms The alarm relay on the MDSL board is activated by major and minor alarms. This area is enabled if the Alarm relay closure hardware option (N41HMSDLAK) has been installed. 194 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.1.2 - Output item Figure 4.33: Parameters related to output Purpose: set the output signal. In the Output clock area Internally synthesised The MPEG output signal rate is given by an adjustable internal frequency synthesiser. It is possible, using the Set command two lines below, to optimise the rate by minimising the number of null packets sent by the encoder. The calculation takes into account the values of the component rates generated by the device as well as the rates allocated to signalling and ECM. Notes: 1. If the TS output is exceeded, the component rate must not be increased. If this is the case, firstly reduce the component rate. It is necessary to increase first the TS output and then the component rate. 2. If the Set command does not take into account the Output clock changes when you modify the Max bitrate value. For example: 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 195 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application - Change the Max bitrate value, - Click on the OK button and close the window, - Open the window and click on Set command, - Validate the changes. Optimal frequency Minimum clock frequency of the TS for transmitting the defined service. This frequency can be calculated with the Set button. It can be useful to help recording the TS output on a server. In the Maximum Bitrates area Signalisation This value sets the alarm generation threshold and reserves the output rate required to send the signalling. When the equipment output rate is low, it is necessary to make adjustments to optimise the reserved rate. The maximum value is 3Mbit/s. ECM Used for alarm generation. In the TS packet size area, the operator can choose the size of packets multiplexed in the outgoing TS. 188 bytes This button corresponds to the standardised TS packet size, conforming to the MPEG2 ISO 13818-1: Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio: Systems standard. 188+16 bytes The device adds 16 stuffing bytes after each 188 byte packet. This mode may be used when the device is connected to a satellite or cable modulator. The modulator then replaces these bytes by Reed-Solomon error correcting code. Note: When the ISMB board is used, TS packets must be in 188 + 16 form. 196 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.1.3 - Encoders item Figure 4.34: Parameters related to encoders Purpose: set internal encoding elements (video, audio, teletext). In the Service encoder area LTW offset This parameter (Legal Time Window Offset) indicates to any subsequent multiplexer the procedure for using the Buffer BSmux of decoder model T-STD for that TS flow. In the Video compression area, the Mode parameter determines the mode which will be used to extract compressed frames from decoder buffers. Leak Extraction is conditioned by PTS/DTS time stamps. VBV delay (Video Buffering Verifier) Not available in this version. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 197 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application In the PCR clock generation area Internal reference The clock is generated by the encoders internal oscillator. Synchronized on PCR ... The clock is generated by the encoders internal oscillator. The oscillator is synchronised with an incoming PCR on the TS input defined by PID xxxx. In the Audio delay matching for Multi Encoder Service (MES) area, In the case of Multi-Encoder services, several encoders are cascaded but only one of them generates the video component. The others generate the audio components. The settings for this area adjust the audio delay according to the video delay in the encoder that generates the video component, thus producing correct synchronisation (lipsync). This delay depends on the video encoders configuration. This encoder does not generate the MES video component The encoder does not generate the video compenent and the delays defined in the following 2 settings are enabled. Configuring the encoder that generates the MES video: SuperEncoder filtering Off: The video encoder is not fitted with a SuperEncoder board. with C1P: The first encoding pass function of the SuperEncoder board in the video encoder is enabled. with C1P & RDB: The first encoding pass and Noise Reduction functions of the SuperEncoder board in the video encoder are enabled. without C1P & RDB: The first encoding pass and Noise Reduction functions of the SuperEncoder board in the video encoder are disabled. Analog video board type defines the analogue video board type used by the video encoder. No analog video board: The video comes from the digital signal. DPSN: The video is injected onto the DPSN board. COMPIN with synchro off: The video is injected onto the COMPIN board with internal board synchronisation. COMPIN with synchro on: The video is injected onto 198 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 the COMPIN board and is synchronised by an external signal. In the SuperEncoder Board area, This area is never enabled with a 4110 encoder. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 199 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.1.4 - Data injection item Figure 4.35: Parameters related to data injection Purpose: set data injection by the TCP DVB protocol. In the Data or EMM injection using DVB Simulcrypt area Service port Used for data or EMM injection with the DVB simulcrypt protocol, this field specifies the port used for data injection in TCP mode and bandwidth negotiation in UDP mode. In UDP mode, bandwidth negotiation is optional. Value between 0 and 65535. Default value: 32000. If changed a device reboot is necessary. 200 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.1.5 - Scrambler item Figure 4.36: Parameters related to scrambler Purpose: scrambling and access control configuration. In the General scrambling area ECM repetition rate This parameter sets the rate of ECM messages. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 201 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.1.6 - SAM card item Figure 4.37: Parameters related to SAM card Purpose: generating and authenticating control words. In the SAM card area Detachable The Detachable SAM card function is not available for encoders and hence greyed out. Integrated Generation and authentication of control words is performed by software installed in the equipment which emulates an external SAM card. The set-up of an external SAM card therefore becomes unnecessary. 202 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.1.7 - Access control item Figure 4.38: Parameters related to Access Control Purpose: assigning Access Control management, irrelevant in a Stand-Alone context. In the Access control area None The services or components are not subject to Access Control (VIACCESS or SIMULCRYPT). External Select this field when the services or components are subject to Access Control (VIACCESS or SIMULCRYPT). Access Control is managed by the DBS 29xx Channel Controller (MCC). 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 203 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.1.8 - SIMS item Figure 4.39: Parameters related to SIMS Purpose: configure connections between the encoder and a SIMS (Signalisation Information Management System). In the Signalisation Management System Identification area IP Address Address of the SIMS. The network and sub-network fields must be identical to those in the encoder IP address. In the Inform SIMS about the broadcast signalisation area No This command disables the link from the encoder to the SIMS. Yes This command enables the link from the encoder to the SIMS. Unless otherwise indicated in the Non standard port field, the link uses standard port 2005. Non standard port Text box to input the value of a different port to the standard port. In the Broadcast SIMS signalisation area No This command disables the link from the SIMS to the encoder. 204 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Yes This command enables the link from the SIMS to the encoder. Unless otherwise indicated in the Non standard port field, the link uses standard port 2006. Non standard port Text box to input the value of a different port to the standard port. DVB Signalling Master This command forces insertion of the SDT actual and EIT from the SIMS. Caution: It is essential that closed socket detection time-out by SIGMA SI is one minute instead of two hours, as by default on a PC. If the time-out remains at two hours, a reset encoder cannot establish a connection with SIGMA until the two hours are up. 4.5.3.1.9 - Time item Figure 4.40: Parameters related to time Purpose: time setting. The time supported by the device is UTC time. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 205 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application In the Time setting area Manual Equipment time setting is performed from the commands on the front panel of the device. Automatic. Set up by messages broadcast on port: Equipment time setting is performed from messages received on the Ethernet link providing UTC time. The messages are sent by the {GALET} UTC Time Broadcaster software installed on the Operating station. {GALET} software is an option. Port 4000 is the default reception port. Automatic. Set up by TDT table received on input: Available for devices featuring the TS input option. In the Local time offset for front panel area Local time - UTC time This parameter sets the current difference between local time displayed on the front panel and UTC time. New offset Values of time change update. Valid from (dd/mm/yyyy) Date of time change update. 206 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.1.10 - TBS Signalling item Figure 4.41: Parameters related to TBS signalling Purpose: set table broadcasting frequency. In the MDT table area Generate MDT In order to support the detection of service failure, provide information for remedial measures and efficiently log such events, a transport mechanism, the Multiplex Diagnostic Table (MDT) has been defined by SES (Socit Europenne des Satellites). This system will serve to convey diagnostic information about the consistency of all DVB/MPEG-2 multiplexes on ASTRA to the central DINO in Betzdorf. The MDT can be generated by the encoder to signal missing streams (e.g. video, audio, subtitle or accompanied data) or Service Information components (e.g. NIT, SDT, EIT or TDT) within the multiplex. In the INBAND command parameters area ICT Repetition rate Repetition rate of the private ICT table used to transport INBAND commands. The default value is 0.5s. Component stream Value used by the encoder to indicate the stream type of the INBAND COMMAND components in the service PMTs. The default value is 170. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 207 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application In the INBAND command management area Execute commands Check this box if the device is to process or ignore the INBAND commands it receives. Default value: On. Don't forward commands Check this box if the device is to filter all INBAND commands received. This parameter does not affect INBAND commands created on the device. Default value: On. Notes: The parameters in the INBAND command management and INBAND Splicing com- mand areas are only visible on devices featuring at least one TS input. The Inband command is irrelevant for the DBE 4110 encoder. 208 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.1.11 - ISO Signalling item Figure 4.42: Parameters related to ISO signalling Purpose: set table broadcasting frequency. This panel is used to set the recurrence of PSI (PAT, PMT, CAT) table transmission in the output signal. In the TS identification area Original_network_id and Transport_stream_id These parameters identify the output flow in a unique way (there must be no two flows with the same Original_network_id/Transport_stream_id). These parameters are inserted in the internal signalling tables and the external source EIT actual signalling tables. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 209 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.1.12 - DVB Signalling item Figure 4.43: Parameters related to DVB signalling Purpose: set table broadcasting frequency. Repetition rates of DVB actual tables area This panel is used to set the recurrence of DVB (NIT, SDT, TOT, BAT, TDT, EITp/f, EITs) table transmission in the output signal. Notes: 1. When a table or sub-table is externally loaded with a defined repetition rate, it is no longer affected by these default values. 2.When a sub-table is loaded in an multiplexer to replace a previous one, the replacement actually happens when the previous equivalent sub-table has been transmitted in full (i.e. after the last section of the sub-table). In the meantime, the new sub-table is stored but not transmitted. In addition, each sub-table has to be sent at least once to avoid discontinuity of version numbers. Various side effects ensue: 210 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 - in the intermediate stage, the two sub-tables co-exist and take up space in the device buffers, - if another equivalent sub-table is loaded in the intermediate stage, there will be three sub-tables in the memory, - if EITs (with a very slow broadcast rate) are loaded very quickly, it is possible to end up with a number of equivalent tables at the same time which may require several seconds to clear. For example, when five EIT tables are loaded very quickly (with a repetition rate of 10 seconds), the last one loaded will be transmitted 40 to 50 seconds after loading. 3. Only the EIT_schedule 80 to 84 tables are supported by devices (equivalent to 20 days of programme guide). Generate TSDT area The TSDT table is an ISO table, the contents of which are defined by DVB. This table is used in DSNG applications where editing of the SI tables in the field may be impossible due to operational problems (compliant with ETS prEN 301 210 standard). The TSDT is used to identify the transmitting satellite station. The station identification parameter entered here is displayed on the front panel of the encoder. Repetition rates of DVB other tables area This panel is used to set the recurrence of DVB other table transmission in the output signal. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 211 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.1.13 - PSIP Signalling item This item is displayed in place of "DVB Signalling" if in the General area the PSIP terrestrial or PSIP cable box is checked. The "PSIP Signalling" item is reserved for standard ATSC. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 212 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.2 - Modulator parameters , ,, , Procedure for editing modulator parameters 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Edit modulator parameters... command. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 213 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application The following dialogue box displays modulator parameters. Figure 4.44: Modulator parameters The Output parameters area consists of the following fields: Roll-off Automatic, selects 35% for DVB-QPSK modes and 26% for NTC-8PSK and NTC-16 QAM modes. Convolution QPSK 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 6/7, 7/8. 8PSK 2/3, 5/6, 8/9. 16QAM 3/4, 7/8. IF/RF level Default value: -20dBm Min: -20dBm. Max: +5dBm Frequency (IF/RF) Default value: 70MHz Min: 50MHz. Max: 180MHz L_Band level Default value: -20dBm Min: -20dBm. Max: +5dBm Note: the 0.5dBm level step is not managed by the DBS 2930. Note: the 125Hz frequency step is not managed by the DBS 2930. Note: the 0.5dBm level step is not managed by the DBS 2930. 214 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Frequency (L_Band) Default value: 1140MHz Min: 950MHz. Max: 1750MHz The Output control area consists of the following fields: Transmission/Modulation On, Pure carrier or Off. Spectral inversion On or Off. The Information area consists of the following consult fields: Input bitrate, Packet size, Symbol rate, Bandwidth. 4. Click on OK. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed in turn for you to confirm your entry. Note: the 1kHz frequency step is managed by the DBS 2930. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 215 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.3 - NIT table The {Technical Configuration} application has a function for editing the NIT actual (Network Information Table) and different options such as descriptor modification or deletion and saving of tables in file format. The NIT actual consists of descriptors related to the actual network (the actual network is the network to which the Transport Stream from the device belongs) and to the various TSs in the network. Descriptors must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". The NIT actual allows decoders to find the list of channels and services belonging to the current network. 4.5.3.3.1 - Edit the NIT , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 216 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3. Choose the NIT > command. 4. Choose the Edit... command. A dialogue box will be displayed containing the contents of the table. Figure 4.45: Editing the NIT The dialogue box contains two parts: Descriptors: display of descriptors for the network and Transport Streams (TS). Parameters: display of parameters relating to the item selected in the Descriptors part. Notes: There is only one Network actual item. A NIT actual network may contain several TSs. A Network or TS item can contain several descriptors. Edit... Save... Load... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 217 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application , ,, , Procedure for editing a network descriptor 1. Select the existing Network item in the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Enter the Network ID in the Parameters side of the dialogue box as required. 3. Click on the Add... button. A new dialogue box is displayed: Figure 4.46: Add a Descriptor or Transport Stream item 4. Choose the Descriptor option and click on OK. The dialogue box displayed can be used to select the required network descriptor. Figure 4.47: Editing a descriptor 5. Select the required option. The pull-down Standard option allows a choice between the various descriptors in the dialogue box: network_name, ML_network_name, linkage, private_data_specifier and stuffing. These descriptors are defined in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". Click on OK. 218 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The initial dialogue box will display the selected descriptors on the left-hand Descriptors side. 6. Fill in the fields specific to the descriptor. 7. Repeat the last four steps for each required descriptor. 8. Click on OK. 9. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed in turn for you to confirm your entry. Editing a Transport Stream descriptor To edit a TS descriptor the TS item has to be created beforehand and then edited via TS item descriptor editing. , ,, , Procedure to create the Transport Stream item 1. Select the Network item on the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Click on the Add... button. 3. Choose the Transport stream option in the dialogue box (Figure 4.46) and click on OK. The Original Network ID set by default is that of the network. The TS ID entered must be between 1 and 65535. , ,, , Procedure to edit or add a descriptor in the TS item 1. Select the TS item on the Descriptors side of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Click on the Add... button. 3. Choose the Descriptor option in the dialogue box (Figure 4.46) and click on OK. 4. Choose one of the various descriptors that appears in the dialogue box: cable_delivery, satellite_delivery, terrestrial_delivery, frequency_list, private_data_specifier, service_list and stuffing. These descriptors are defined in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". Click on OK. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 219 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 5. Fill in the fields specific to the descriptor. 6. Repeat the last four steps for each required descriptor. 7. Click on OK. 8. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 4.5.3.3.2 - Changing descriptors , ,, , Procedure for changing a network or TS descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be changed in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Change the parameters in the right-hand Parameters part of the dialogue box. 3. Click on OK. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed in turn for you to confirm your entry. 4.5.3.3.3 - Deleting descriptors , ,, , Procedure for deleting a network descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be deleted in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box (Figure 4.45 page 216). 2. Click on the Remove... button. 3. Click on OK. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 220 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT When the new configuration is activated, the NIT is inserted in the TS output flow. This table is stored by the equipment. The application offers the additional possibility of saving the NITs in file format (save on PC or another storage medium) as, for example, when upgrading the software version, the saved memory is reset and the previous configuration is lost for the saved NIT. The NIT then requires reloading from the {Technical Configuration} application. , ,, , Procedure for saving a NIT 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the NIT... command. 4. Choose the Save... command. A dialogue box is displayed to enter the parameters required for saving the file, i.e. the file name and a comment associated with the file. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... Edit... Save... Load... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 221 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Figure 4.48: Saving a NIT There is no point in giving a file extension, as the software adds the extension (.dvb) to all saved NIT files. The file will be saved in the directory indicated in the dialogue box. The directory can be changed by clicking on the Browse... button. , ,, , Procedure for loading a NIT 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 222 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3. Choose the NIT... command. 4. Choose the Load... command. A dialogue box is displayed for choosing the saved file to be used. Figure 4.49: Loading a saved file The dialogue box shows the configurations available in the current directory. Edit... Save... Load... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 223 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.4 - TOT table The TOT is a DVB signalling table which gives the offsets between local time and UTC time for a list of countries. This table must be changed before the clocks change from summer to winter time and vice versa. 4.5.3.4.1 - Edit the TOT , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the TOT > command. 4. Choose the Edit... command. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... Edit... Save... Load... 224 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 A dialogue box will be displayed containing the contents of the table. Figure 4.50: Editing the TOT When creating a TOT it is necessary to declare a Local time offset descriptor, a list of time offsets will be associated. In a list, the number of elements is limited to 13. , ,, , Procedure for adding a TOT descriptor 1. Click on the Add... button. 2. A second dialogue box is displayed: Figure 4.51: Add a descriptor 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 225 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 3. Click on OK to add the Local time offset descriptor to the list. The previous dialogue box will then display the descriptor on the left-hand side as shown below: Figure 4.52: Editing the TOT 4. Click on Add... in the right-hand panel. A dialogue box will be displayed for you to select the country concerned. Edit the parameters and click on OK. Figure 4.53: Adding a time offset The country and its details will be added to the list of time offsets in the previous dialogue box. Click on OK. 226 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 For the Country field, a list of countries is given by default. But it is possible to type three characters for the country code which is not proposed in the list. The lists of default language and country codes can be customised to include additional languages or countries or restrict default lists to the most common choices. These lists can be customised by changing the content of the codes.ini text file in the DBS 2930 setup directory. When language or country codes are defined in this file, the DBS 2930 uses these instead of the default lists regardless of the version (French or English) of the DBS 2930. The order in which codes are declared sets the order in which they appear in the choice lists. The file format observes Windows .ini file syntax. Example of a .ini file [country_code] FRA=France [ISO_639_language_code] est=Estonien fre=Franais The [country_code] section contains the country codes. The name of each key is the ISO 8859-1 three-character code for the country. Its value is the text to be displayed in the list of choices. The [ISO_639_language_code] section contains the language codes. The name of each key is the ISO 639 three-character code for the language. Its value is the text to be displayed in the list of choices. Lines not observing the specified syntax are ignored. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 227 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application The procedure for changing and deleting descriptors is similar to that explained for the NIT. 4.5.3.4.2 - Changing descriptors , ,, , Procedure for changing a TOT descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be changed in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box (Figure 4.52 page 225). 2. Click on Edit... and change the parameters in the right-hand List of time offsets part of the dialogue box. 3. Click on OK. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Two dialogue boxes will then be displayed in turn for you to confirm your entry. 4.5.3.4.3 - Deleting descriptors , ,, , Procedure for deleting a TOT descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be deleted in the Descriptors part of the dialogue box (Figure 4.52 page 225). 2. Click on Remove. 3. Click on Yes to confirm your choice. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). The TOT table saving and loading functions are identical to those for the NIT (see section 4.5.3.3.4 - Saving/Loading a NIT page 220) except that the TOT > command is used instead of NIT >. As for NITs, the application offers the additional possibility of saving the TOTs in file format (save on PC or another storage medium) as, for example, when upgrading the software version, the saved memory is reset and the previous configuration is lost for the saved TOT. The TOT then requires reloading from the {Technical Configuration} application. 228 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.3.5 - Saving/Loading a device configuration The active configuration is stored by the equipment. The application offers the additional possibility of saving all edited configurations (not necessarily activated) in file format (save on PC or another storage medium). , ,, , Procedure to save a configuration 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Save device configuration... command. A dialogue box is displayed to enter the parameters required for the saved file, i.e the file name and a comment associated with the file. Figure 4.54: Saving a configuration Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 229 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application There is no point in giving a file extension as the software adds the same extension (.mcf) to all saved files. The file will be saved in the directory specified in the dialogue box. The directory can be changed by clicking on the Browse... button. , ,, , Procedure to load a configuration 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Load device configuration... command. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 230 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 A dialogue box is displayed to choose the configuration to use. Figure 4.55: Loading a device configuration The dialogue box shows the configurations available in the current directory. The Browse... button can be used to change directories. Configurations are presented in list form. For each configuration the following is displayed: the name of the file saved, the comment made by the operator when the file was saved. 4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations This menu is used to: configure the device with configurations stored in the memory, save configurations, erase saved configurations. Caution: The operator is recommended to save all configurations on PC in addition to those saved on the DBE 4110. If software is installed subsequently, configurations on the DBE 4110 may be lost, in which case those saved on PC can be restored to the device using the Control & Command software. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 231 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application , ,, , Procedure for saving, recalling or clearing configurations 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Archived configurations... command. Figure 4.56: Archived configurations Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 232 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The Configuration area consists of the following fields: Name Enter the name of the configuration. It is also possible to select the number of the configuration directly. Save Save a current configuration. Recall Recall a saved configuration. Clear Clear a saved configuration. " " " " Concerning the factory-installed configurations The encoder has three factory-installed configurations accessible by the Recall command and saved in memories A (SNG-LBR), B (SNG-HBR) and C (LBR+DATA), which cannot be cleared. These configurations serve as a base from which users can easily develop their own configurations. Note: Not all encoder parameters are set in the factory installed configurations. For example, 50/60 Hz mode is not taken into account. The following table gives the values of the parameters taken into account by factory-set configurations SNG-LBR, SNG-HBR and LBR-DATA. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 233 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application A (SNG-LBR) B (SNG-HBR) C (LBR+DATA) SERVICE Service ID 100 100 100 PMT PID 257 257 257 PCR PID 100 100 100 Type Digital TV Service (1) Digital TV Service (1) Digital TV Service (1) Name TV TV TV Provider name None None None Scrambling Clear mode Clear mode Clear mode VIDEO Source 4:2:0 MP@ML 4:2:2@ML 4:2:0 MP@ML PID 100 100 100 Bit Rate 7.6 Mbit/s 20 Mbit/s 9 Mbit/s Coding No low delay No low delay No low delay Input SDI SDI SDI Resolution 720x576 720x576 720x576 GOP 12 12 12 IP frame 3 3 3 Aspect ratio 4/3 4/3 4/3 AUDIO1&2 Input Analog Analog Analog PID audio 1 110 110 110 PID audio 2 111 111 111 Bit rate 256 kbit/s 384 kbit/s 256 kbit/s Type Stereo Stereo Stereo Coding MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2 MPEG1 Layer 2 DATA PID Not used Not used 103 Baud rate Not used Not used 9600 Stream type Not used Not used 0x80 TRANSMISSION Symbol rate 6.111 Ms/s 23.333 Ms/s 6.666 Ms/s Modulation QPSK QPSK QPSK Code rate 3/4 7/8 7/8 Roll Off Auto Auto Auto Level -15 dBm -15 dBm -15 dBm Output Off Air Off Air Off Air Spectral inversion Off Off Off Packet size 188 188 204 IF frequency 70 MHz 70 MHz 70 MHz L-band 1140 MHz 1140 MHz 1140 MHz 234 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 A confirmation request is displayed when recalling an archived configuration. Figure 4.57: Confirmation request The following dialogue box is then displayed. Figure 4.58: Validation dialogue box 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 235 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.7 - Cancelling/Validating changes These commands are used to cancel or confirm changes to a device configuration. , ,, , Procedure for cancelling changes 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Cancel modifications... command. The following dialogue box is displayed: 4. Click on OK. After confirmation, the command is run and the display reflects the devices active configuration. Note: The
button
or the Edit/Cancel... command in the menu bar achieve the same effect. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 236 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 , ,, , Procedure for validating changes 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Validate modifications... command. The following dialogue box is displayed. 4. Click on OK. After confirmation, the command is run and the display reflects the devices active configuration. The lower right-hand edge of the main window now displays the words "Active configuration" and the pencil icon next to the device has disappeared. Note: The
button
or the Edit/Validate... command in the menu bar achieve the same effect. Edit advanced parameters... Edit modulator parameters... NIT > TOT > Load device configuration... Save device configuration... Archived configurations... Cancel modifications... Validate modifications... Lock device... Unlock device... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 237 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.3.8 - Device locking / unlocking For details on this function, please refer to 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking page 165. 238 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.4 - Generated Services The Generated Services item located underneath the encoder groups together the services generated locally. Figure 4.59: Generated Services The Create a new service... command allows the encoder to generate services such as TV, radio, mosaic, VBI data, EMM (Entitlement Management Message) or NVOD (Near Video On Demand). There are 4 types of components: video, audio, VBI and data. The following table contains the restrictions for assigning components to services. The number of components is also limited by the component resources available to the DBE 4110. Note: The maximum number of audio components is imposed by the encoder model. Service Components video audio VBI data TV 1 1 or more 0 to 4 0 or more Radio 0 1 or more 0 0 or more VBI data 0 0 1 0 or more 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 239 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.4.1 - TV service The procedure for creating a TV service using 4 components is as follows: 1. Select Generated Services under the device in the tree structure. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Create a new service... command. A dialogue box will be displayed to enter the type of service. Figure 4.60: Generate a new service Given the number of parameters to enter, the box contains several panels in succession accessible via the Next> and <Back buttons. The Next> button is used to go to the next panel. The <Back button cancels editing for the current panel and takes you back to the previous panel. The OK button confirms the set of parameters and proceeds with generating the service. Create a new service... Manage ghost components Not manage ghost components 240 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4. In the dialogue box, select the service type TV. 5. Click on Next>. A dialogue box is displayed to enter parameters relating to the service. Figure 4.61: Service parameter entry The Signalisation area contains the following fields: Service id Service identifier. The generation of a local service can result in a transiting service being stopped. This is the case when the service ID required has already been allocated to a transiting service. When the service is stopped the AID_SRV_ID_CONFLICT alarm is raised. It is not possible to generate a service locally with service_id 0xFFFF. Type Select the service type from TV, Radio, Mosaic, Teletext, NVOD reference and NVOD item. Name and Provider The decoder uses these character strings to display to the user the name of the service and the service provider. Present and following (EIT)When the EIT present/following flag is set in the SDT table, this field informs the decoders of the presence or absence of information (Electronic programme guide) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 241 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application about the "present" and "following" events of the service. This private data information is provided by an external device and transported in the MPEG2/DVB stream via EITs (Event Information Tables). Schedule events (EITs) Same comment as above but concerning "scheduled" events, i.e. those after the "following" event. The Multiplex area contains the following fields: Running status This field offers several broadcasting types. This parameter is used to insert (or not, as appropriate) the service and its components in the outgoing TS and affects the Running Status field in the SDT indicating service status. When the running status is off, the corresponding service will not be output. PID PMT PID in which the PMT describing the service will be inserted (a default figure is provided). Services may use PID PMTs specific to each one or a PID PMT common to all of them. PID PCR PID in which the reference clock PCR is transmitted. The PID of the component carrying the PCR is called Service PID. 6. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 7. Click on Next>. A new dialogue box is displayed to select the components to be assigned to the service. 242 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.62: Selection of TV service components It is possible to select several components. 8. In the Available components box, select the required component(s) (check boxes). 9. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the three dialogue boxes. The service created, and its components, are displayed in the main window. Figure 4.63: Created service display 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 243 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 10. Confirm your choice by clicking on the button. 4.5.4.1.1 - Editing parameters of the video component , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the video component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component- specific commands. 3. Choose the Edit parameters... command. The dialogue box displayed is made up of three panels plus an additional Acquisition panel if the COMPIN board is used. Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info... 244 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 General parameters panel Figure 4.64: Entry of video component parameters (General parameters) The Source and Profile parameters have the following values: Source Choice between SDI, DPSN/PAL BDGHI if 50Hz frequency is set in the Edit advanced parameters panel, see section 4.5.3.1.1 - General item page 192, DPSN/SECAM if 50Hz frequency is set in the Edit advanced parameters panel, NTSC M if 60Hz frequency is set in the Edit advanced parameters panel, PATTERN. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 245 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Note: The COMPIN composite video acquisition board gives access to more acquisition parameters than a DPSN board. When configuring a video component, the list of sources is extended and an additional Acquisition page is displayed. See page 252 for information on this page. If COMPIN board is used, the following additional sources are available: COMPIN/PAL BDGHI in 50 Hz (as shown in Figure 4.65), COMPIN/NTSC in 60 Hz (as shown in Figure 4.66). Figure 4.65: COMPIN/PAL BDGHI option in 50Hz Figure 4.66: COMPIN/NTSC option in 60Hz 246 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Notes: 1. When the Pattern source is selected, the internal PLL is no longer locked onto the video input, but to a fixed internal frequency. In these conditions, the SDI audio source transmitted with the video signal could give rise to alarms due to synchronisation problems, thereby creating disturbance in the sound signal. 2. There is no test to check whether the same PID is used as the output PID of two transiting components. PID instructions are considered to be instruction opportunities and only apply when the components do indeed feature on input. If however, the two components were to exist at the same time, one of them would be stopped and an alarm raised. Profile Choice between MP@ML and 422P@ML. The Multiplex parameters area has the following fields: PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the video component. PCR Choice between No PCR: the component does not carry the PCR, Service PCR: the component is referenced to carry the service PCR. In this case, the PID of this component fills the PCR PID field in the Service dialogue box (Figure 4.61 page 240), Contains a PCR: the component carries a PCR without being referenced to carry the Service PCR. In this case, each component of the service can carry the PCR. These facilities mean that in remultiplexing operations, a TV service containing one video and several audios may be split into one TV service and several radio services each containing a single audio only. Off air This field is used to suspend transmission of the component without erasing it from the configuration. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 247 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application The Compression area has the following fields: Rate value between 0.5 and 15 Mb/s if MP@ML. value between 0.5 and 50 Mb/s if 4:2:2 P@ML. The operator can now set a video bitrate lower than the minimum bitrate indicated in the DBE 41xx encoder technical specifications. However, in any case an input of under 0.5 Mbit/s is rejected. When exiting the video parameter editing screen, a warning message requests the operator to confirm settings. The message specifies the minimum bitrate recommended by NEXTREAM for information purposes (i.e. 2 Mbit/s). Figure 4.67: Warning message Mode The mode optimises video compression. In Film mode, encoding and motion prediction are forced to frame mode because there is no motion between the 2 interleaved fields making up the frame. In Video mode, encoding and motion prediction are forced to field mode. In Auto mode, the encoder itself sets the best mode (film or video) having analysed the two interleaved fields. Only auto mode is capable of correct processing of a 3:2 pull down film mode (60Hz). Format Choice between Manual: format specified by the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9, Automatic WSS: format assignment depends on the WSS (Wide Screen Signaling) information contained in the incident 4:2:2 video signal. In case of non- 248 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 reception of the WSS signal, the format is specified by the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9. Note: With an SDI source transporting WSS in digital form (DID/SDID), you must declare the digital WSS in one of the VBI components (see section 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component page 264). In any other case, it is all done automatically. Automatic AFD: format assignment depends on the AFD (Automatic Format Description) information contained in the incident 4:2:2 video signal. In case of non-reception of the AFD signal, the format is specified by the field Default value 4:3 or 16:9. Note: The AFD, also known as ARD, was defined by the BBC. It is the modified "video index" (line 11 and 324 in 50 Hz and 14 and 277 in 60 Hz) which supplies, among other things, information on image format (4:3, 16:9). The AFD can only be received in a video from the SDI input. The Aspect ratio default value is used until the AFD data has been received. Once the AFD has been detected, the image format is determined by the AFD data. Unlike WSS, when the AFD data disappears, the image format keeps the format contained in the AFD (it does not revert to the default format). 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 249 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Advanced parameters panel Figure 4.68: Entry of video component parameters (Advanced parameters) The Compression area has the following fields: P picture period (M) and GOP size (N) The P picture period (M) parameter, from 1 to 3 and always less than the N parameter, defines the recurrence of non-bidirectional pictures (P pictures). Note: In low delay mode, the P picture period (M) parameter is forced to 1. The GOP size (N) parameter, from M value to 24, defines recurrence of Intra pictures (I pictures). Examples of GOP M/N with B referring to bidirectional predicted pictures: GOP M=3, N=12: IBBPBBPBBPBBI GOP M=1, N=4: IPPPI 250 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Picture resolution This field allows the picture resolution to be reduced in the event of a low video rate. The picture resolution depends on the picture rate: In 50 Hz, 352 pixels x 288 lines 352 pixels x 576 lines 480 pixels x 576 lines 544 pixels x 576 lines 704 pixels x 576 lines 720 pixels x 576 lines In 60 Hz, 352 pixels x 240 lines 352 pixels x 480 lines 480 pixels x 480 lines 544 pixels x 480 lines 704 pixels x 480 lines 720 pixels x 480 lines Compression delay Normal, Low or Ultra low (flag in the TS packet header). Use closed GOP mode The first B pictures of a GOP (just after intra pictures) are predicted with "backward-only" mode in order to allow bitstream editing. PES info Define the Priority (Normal or High), Copyright (With or Without) and Content (Original or Copy) (flag in the TS packet header) for PES information. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 251 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Optimal configurations: 1. Normal mode 2. Low delay mode (for remote interviews) 3. Ultra low delay mode MP@ML 422@ML Max bit rate 15 Mb/s 50 Mb/s Min recommended bit rate / Min bitrate allowed 720 pixels: 2 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 702 pixels: 2 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 544 pixels: 1.5 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 480 pixels: 1.5 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 352 pixels: 1 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s SIF: 1 Mb/s (regardless of GOP structure) / 0.5Mb/s 4 Mb/s (regardless of GOP structure) Optimal GOP structure bit rate<8 Mb/s: 12/3 bit rate>8 Mb/s: 12/2 4Mb/s<bit rate<8Mb/s: 12/3 8Mb/s<bit rate<15Mb/s: 12/2 15Mb/s<bitrate<30Mb/s: 8/1 bit rate>30Mb/s: 2/1 MP@ML 422@ML Max bit rate 15 Mb/s 50 Mb/s Min recommended bit rate / Min bitrate allowed 4 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s 6 Mb/s / 0.5Mb/s Optimal GOP structure 12/1 6Mb/s<bitrate<15Mb/s: 12/1 15Mb/s<bitrate<30Mb/s: 8/1 bit rate>30Mb/s: 2/1 MP@ML 422@ML Max bit rate 15 Mb/s 50 Mb/s Min recommended bit rate / Min bitrate allowed 6 Mb/s 0.5Mb/s 6 Mb/s 0.5Mb/s Fixed GOP structure 1/1 252 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Notes: 1. The low delay software option (N41SLODE), installed as standard, is required for access to Ultra Low Delay mode. 2. When Ultra Low Delay mode is activated, sound and image synchronisation is not guaranteed with audio components from AMUSE boards. In addition, M and N parameters are forced to 1 (the video contains only I images). Acquisition parameters panel Figure 4.69: Entry of video component parameters (Acquisition parameters) The Analog video conversion area has the following fields: VTR mode Check the box if the composite signal comes from a VTR not featuring a TBC (Time Base Corrector) or if it is very poor quality. Default value: Off. External synchro Check the box to enable the internal frame 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 253 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application synchroniser. Default value: Off The NTSC conversion area has the following fields: Check the Standard pedestal box if the NTSC signal features a pedestal as per ITU-R 470 standard. Default value: Standard pedestal. This parameter is only visible if the source is COMPIN/NTSC. VBI parameters panel Figure 4.70: Entry of video component parameters (VBI parameters) Use VITC/DVITC The VITC/DVITC information contains a time-code. After extraction from the video field blanking (digital or analogue) the VITC/DVITC is transmitted in the 254 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 MPEG2 video component. The DVITC must be carried by one line only (between line 6 and line 22). Notes: 1. The N41SVBIP (VBI Processing) option is required to obtain this function. 2. VITC/DVITC in DID/SDID form cannot be processed by the encoder. 4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue boxes and click on OK. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 255 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.4.1.2 - Editing parameters of the audio component , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the audio component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component- specific commands. 3. Choose the Edit parameters... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the audio component to be edited. General audio panel Figure 4.71: Entry of audio component (general parameters) Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info... 256 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The Source area consists of the following fields: Source and Group/Channel (the latter only if the SDI source is selected): The source of the signal to be processed depends on the audio component number, presence of the AMuSE board, presence of the ATADI board. Note: It is possible to configure the audio components using the compressors of the AMUSE board to produce an audio test signal. To do this, select Pattern in the list of sources in the audio component parameter editing screen. The audio sources are summarised in the following table: Component Encoder name Board/Audio compressor Possible source Mandatory conditions Audio 1 [SSEB/AUD1] SDI /Group x/Channel 1 Analog 1 PATTERN ATADI/Balanced 1 ATADI/Unbalanced 1 ATADI present ATADI present Audio 2 [SSEB/AUD2] SDI /Group x/Channel 2 Analog 2 PATTERN ATADI/Balanced 2 ATADI/Unbalanced 2 ATADI present ATADI present Audio 3 [AMU2/AUD1] SDI/Group u/Channel 1 Balanced 1 Unbalanced 1 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 Audio 4 [AMU2/AUD2] SDI/Group u/Channel 2 Balanced 2 Unbalanced 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 Audio 5 [AMU2/AUD3] SDI/Group v/Channel 1 Balanced 3 Unbalanced 3 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 Audio 6 [AMU2/AUD4] SDI/Group v/Channel 2 Balanced 4 Unbalanced 4 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 AMUSE present in slot 2 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 257 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Note concerning the audio source names from the SDI input. An SDI signal can contain up to 16 mono audio channels. Two mono audios consti- tute an AES/EBU channel. AES/EBU channels are grouped in pairs and each pair forms a group. The reference of the AES/EBU channel is made up of the group number (1 to 4) and the number of the AES/EBU channel in the pair (1 or 2). Comments: 1. SSEB board: The SSEB board includes 2 stereo audio compressors, thus enabling two stereo audios in the output signal (stereo audios 1 and 2). The possible sources for the each stereo audio are as follows: the SSEB board SDI input; the SSEB board analogue input. When the SDI input is selected, a group number must be supplied. This number identifies the group to which the stereo audio belongs. When the source of the two stereo audios 1 and 2 is SDI, SSEB board internal wiring requires both stereo audios to be taken from the same group (one de-embedder for each pair of stereo audios). Mono Audio 1/1 Audio 3/1 Audio 3/2 Audio 4/1 Audio 4/2 Audio 2/1 Audio 2/2 Audio 1/2 Stereo Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Groups 258 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2. ATADI board (option N41HATADAK): When this board is present, the list of possible sources for the audio 1 and audio 2 components contains two additional options: the balanced digital input; the unbalanced digital input. When the audio 1 and 2 source is a digital input, ATADI board internal wiring requires both inputs to be of the same type (Balanced or Unbalanced). 3. AMuSE board (option N41HAMUBAK): The AMuSE board is now dual-standard, i.e. MPEG-1 Layer II and Dolby AC-3. It is capable of packetising up to four Dolby AC-3 sounds from external audio encoders, or up to four sounds in MPEG-1 Layer II standard It is not possible to combine MPEG-1 Layer II encoding and Dolby AC-3 packetising with the same AMuSE board. The four audio channels on the AMuSE board are configured in either MPEG-1 Layer II or Dolby AC-3. In both cases, for each audio, the source options are as follows: the AMuSE board SDI input; the AES balanced digital input; the AES unbalanced digital input. When SDI input is selected, a group number must be supplied. This number identifies the group to which the audio component belongs. Some restrictions apply: 1. When the audio compressor 1 and 2 sources come from the SDI signal, internal wiring of the AMuSE board requires selection of the same group for the two sources. This rule also applies to compressor 3 and 4 sources. The SDI source (with AC-3 audio) must be synchronous with the one sent to the video encoder (SSEB board). 2. When the audio compressor sources are AES digital inputs, internal wiring of the AMuSE board requires all AES inputs to be of the same type (balanced or unbalanced). When either of these sources is used, the external Dolby encoder must be genlocked through the synchronisation output from the REF OUT connector on the AMuSE board. 4. PATTERN signal: The audio test signal consists in the transmission of a 2100 Hz frequency signal at 0 dBFS (full scale level). Be careful when using the audio test signal, as it produces a very loud sound. Note: In pre-compressed AC-3 mode, the AMuSE board does not generate an internal audio test signal. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 259 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application The Multiplex area has the following fields: PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the audio component. PCR Choice between No PCR: the component does not carry the PCR, Service PCR: the component is referenced to carry the service PCR. In this case, the PID of this component fills the PCR PID field in the Service dialogue box (Figure 4.61 page 240), Contains a PCR: the component carries a PCR without being referenced to carry the Service PCR. In this case, each component of the service can carry the PCR. These facilities mean that in remultiplexing operations, a radio service containing several audios may be split into several radio services each containing a single audio only. Off air This field is used to suspend transmission of the component without erasing it from the configuration. The Compression area has the following fields: Standard MPEG1 Layer II or Dolby AC-3. The Dolby standard is only available when an audio component has been selected from the AMuSE board. Mode Stereo, Joint stereo, Mono or Dual channel. Note concerning activation of Dual PID mode for Monophonic Audio Channels. 1. In the main {Technical Configuration} window select or add a first audio component from a compressor on the SSEB board (SSEB/AUD1 or SSEB/AUD2); 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device specific commands; 3. Choose the Edit parameters... command; 4. Set the audio component mode to Mono left or Mono right; 5. Add a new component (using Add components... in the shortcut menu); 6. Select the same compressor. The components mode will automatically be set to mono-left if the first is in mono- right and vice versa. The two components are transported 260 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 in TS packets with distinct PIDs. Any change made to the compression parameters (Source, VPS, Alignment level, Headroom, Additional delay ("Advanced" window below) applies to both components. To change an audio mono-left or mono-right component to an audio stereo, joint-stereo or dual channel component, the other mono component must be deinstalled. Rate Choice between 64kb/s, 96kb/s, 128kb/s, 192kb/s, 256kb/s and 384kb/s according to the mode (MPEG standard does not allow any Mode/Rate combination). VPS automatic mode In MPEG Layer II compression mode, VPS information contained in the incident 4:2:2 video signal can be used to control automatic selection of the audio mode and the bitrate. When automatic VPS mode is validated, the input values in the Compression mode fields are default values that are only applied in the absence of VPS information. Note: With an SDI source transporting VPS in digital form (DID/SDID), you must declare the digital VPS in one of the VBI components (see section 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component page 264). In any other case, it is all done automatically. Alignment level and Headroom For analogue audio source only: The maximum input level is the analogue level in dBU with input saturation. After conversion, a digital level of 0 dBFS is produced. Two parameters are used to set the maximum input level: alignment level and headroom. Alignment is the level in dBU which corresponds to 0VU. It can be set between 0 and 4 dBU in 1 dBU steps. Headroom is the difference in dB between alignment level and input saturation. It can be set between 8 and 20 dB in 1 dB steps. Physically, the analogue audio input saturation level corresponds to alignment level + headroom in dBU. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 261 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application For example, the alignment level is +4dBU and the headroom 20dB, the 0 dBFS corresponds to +24 dBU. Advanced audio panel Figure 4.72: Entry of audio component (advanced parameters) Additional delay This parameter is used to adjust the phase of the audio component with respect to the video component. The additional delay is used to recover a correct lipsync when a non-standard decoder is used. The accuracy of the value in ms is not guaranteed. Do not use the additional delay to compensate bad audio/video synchronisation of the encoder service signal. Please reboot the DBE 4110 after changing the additional delay. The additional delay should remain set to 0, which corresponds to a correct lipsync (tested with an MSU 4422 decoder). However, in certain conditions the TS bitrate used by 262 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 audio components from an AMUSE board can be reduced by adjusting the Additional Delay setting. TS packetisation is optimised when this parameter is set to +350 ms (see table below). This change is only possible when an MPEG 1 Layer II coded audio component is attached to a service not containing any video component (radio service for instance). The Additional Delay parameter can then be set between 50ms and +350ms instead of - 50ms/+50ms. The DBS 2930 performs the following checks: - when editing the parameters of an audio component, the value of the Additional Delay parameter is checked; - when adding a component to a service, addition of a video component is rejected if the service contains an audio component from an AMuSE board with an Additional Delay value of above 50ms. Figure 4.73: Error message IO bitrate (kbit/s) TS bitrate (kbit/s) SSEB audio AMUSE audio Additional Delay < 50ms Additional Delay = 350ms 64 70 125 70 128 135 186 135 192 205 250 205 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 263 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application PES info Define the Copyright (With or Without) or Content (Original or Copy) (flag in the TS packet header) for PES information. 4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 5. Click on OK. 264 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.4.1.3 - Editing parameters of the VBI component The encoders can extract certain VBI data from the incident video signal and transmit them in one to four VBI components in DVB form with different PIDs. Caution: It is forbidden to declare the same VBI line in several VBI component TSs. The VBI data transport syntax is compliant with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300472 "Specification for conveying ITU-R System B Teletext in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) bitstreams" extended by the TM1952 proposal (October 21, 1997) and a proprietary protocol. VBI inserter The VBI module is capable of processing ancillary data from either the SDI or the PAL input. The following diagrams describe the different ways ancillary data can or cannot be processed: 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 265 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Figure 4.74: Ancillary data processing Diagram 1 shows a VBI inserter function. VBI information from the compo- site video signal is conveyed in the TS bitstream as described in DVB standard. The composite video signal must be externally synchronised with the SDI video source. Diagrams 2 and 3 illustrate a common setup. Diagram 4 shows a configuration similar to diagram 1 but which is not supported. Diagram 5 illustrates the fact that the DBE 4110 cannot simultaneously process VBI information coming from both video inputs. VBI video video + VBI video + VBI video VBI PAL SDI PAL SDI PAL SDI PAL SDI VBI video + VBI PAL SDI 1 2 3 4 5 Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram Diagram 266 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The VBI processor capabilities are given in a table in Chapter 1 Specifications page 21. Caution: Data cannot be encoded simultaneously according to 50Hz and 60Hz MPEG-2 standard. Notes: 1. Each CEEFAX B, VPS, WSS can be mapped into its individual PID (max. 4 PID) or all the previous can be mapped together into the same PID. 2. The same VBI line cannot be associated with different PIDs. , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the VBI component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component- specific commands. 3. Choose the Edit parameters... command. Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 267 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the VBI component to be entered. Figure 4.75: Entry of VBI component parameters The VBI source area consists of the following fields: Source Choice between SDI source from SSEB or AMuSE board, Composite source from DPSN or COMPIN board. Format The VBI data can be in Modulated form or in Digital form. The Modulated Information or Digital Information fields concern all the lines of the VBI component. Modulated indicates that the incoming ancillary data are in the form of analogue signals sampled at 13.5MHz (digitalised waveform VBI). This is the case when DPSN source is selected, COMPIN source is selected, SDI source is selected with an SDI signal supplied by an upstream DBI 2000 AVA (Audio Video Acquisition) device if the VBI processing module operates in transparent mode. 268 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Digital means that the ancillary data are in 4:2:2 field blanking in 10 bit word form with DID/SDID identifiers (compliant with the SMPTE 291M specification "Ancillary data packet and space formatting") and data flows are analysed. This is the case when SDI source is selected with an SDI signal supplied by an upstream DBI 2000 AVA (Audio Video Acquisition) device if the VBI processing module operates in DID/SDID mode. This function is unavailable when the analogue video input from the DPSN or COMPIN board is selected. The Multiplex area consists of the following fields: PID Identification of the TS packets transporting the VBI component. Off air This field is used to suspend transmission of the component without erasing it from the configuration. Edit the parameters and click on OK to confirm. Note: The PCR cannot be carried by a VBI component. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 269 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application The second VBI page is the following: Figure 4.76: VBI Lines The VBI lines area consists of the following fields: Line types Choice between B Teletext, Ceefax B (Magazine), B Subtitles only, Information VPS, WSS and Transparent Line. Lines to be transmitted Selection of frame blanking lines which contain the transmitted VBI data. The first box concerns blanking lines in the first field, whereas the second box concerns blanking lines in the second field. Operating procedure: first select the type (line types), then click on the lines that are to be transmitted. 4. Edit the parameters and click on OK to confirm. 270 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Notes concerning BARCO data: 1. When creating a VBI component for transmitting Monochrome BARCO data, the transparent lines should not contain any other VBI data, otherwise the lines will not be coded and an alarm will be raised. There are no BARCO specific VBI components and MT Transparent should be selected as the VBI line type. 2. The Stream type of the MT Transparent VBI components should be 0x92 which corre- sponds to a BARCO proprietary value. The Stream type of the MT Transparent VBI components (ISO or BARCO) can be selected using the Telnet application. Refer to the section VBI stream type page 398. 3. A Data broadcast id descriptor with a value of 0x0103 (enter this value as the Data broadcast id) should be added to the PMT at the VBI component level. Refer to the section: PMT descriptors page 283. data broadcast id 0x0103 Leave emptyu 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 271 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.4.1.4 - Editing parameters of the data component , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the private data component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component- specific commands. 3. Choose the Edit parameters... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing parameters relating to the private data component to be entered. This dialogue box has two panels: The first panel defines the general parameters of the private data component. It is independent of the data-injection interface. The second panel depends on the injection interface (Ethernet, Serial or TS). First panel: General Parameters Figure 4.77: Entry of private data component (general parameters/Ethernet interface) Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info... 272 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.78: Entry of private data component (general parameters/TS interface) The Source area has the following field: Source Identification of input interface type, Ethernet, Serial Input (if N41SD56K - Data Injection through RS 232 option present) or TS Input (if N41STSIN - ASI TS Input option present). The Multiplex format area has the following fields: Output PID Identification of TS packets which transport the component. Note: For two distinct components, it is not tested that the outgoing PID are different. The PID are considered in the incoming stream. If the two components exists, one of the components are stopped and an alarm is raised. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 273 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Contains the PCR This field allows the program clock reference to be inserted in the TS packet headers transporting the component. The PCR cannot be carried by a serial component. Off air This field is used to suspend transmission of the component without erasing it from the configuration. The Bitrate area has the following fields: Min. bitrate Min. bitrate is not used for the serial components. For the Ethernet interface, if the min. bitrate is exceeded, an alarm is raised. Max. bitrate - This field is used for regulation in the case of an Ethernet source. - For the serial interface, an alarm is generated and stops the component. The Bitrate area has the following fields (for the TS interface): Stop the component if its bitrate is upper than... Stopping instructions can be made on an incoming component associated to a local service. Raise an alarm if its bitrate is lower than An alarm is raised if the measured bitrate is lower than the instruction. If the field is empty, there will be no alarm. The Signalisation area has the following field: Stream type Identification of data type, conforming to MPEG2 standard ISO 13818-1: Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio: Systems. 274 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Second panel: Parameters specific to each injection interface 1. For the serial interface Figure 4.79: Entry of data component (Serial interface parameters) The Parameters area has the following field: Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 275 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 2. For the Ethernet interface Figure 4.80: Entry of data component (Ethernet interface parameters) The Ethernet parameters area contains the following fields: Channel id If the data is input via the Ethernet interface, each data flow must be referenced by a unique channel number in the encoder. This number is recalled on each input. Protocol The proposed protocols are TBS, VIACCESS, UDP DVB Simulcrypt and TCP DVB Simulcrypt. 276 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 TBS protocol The injection of data via the TCP/IP sockets uses a NEXTREAM control/command proprietary protocol. For this protocol there are no specific parameters. Figure 4.81: Ethernet interface, TBS protocol parameters 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 277 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application VIACCESS protocol The injection of data via the TCP/IP sockets uses VIACCESS protocol. This mode is used for the broadcast of VIACCESS EMM. For this protocol there are no specific parameters. Figure 4.82: Ethernet interface, VIACCESS protocol parameters 278 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 UDP DVB Simulcrypt protocol Data is transmitted via UDP/IP according to a protocol defined by DVB. Figure 4.83: Ethernet interface, UDP DVB Simulcrypt protocol parameters For UDP DVB Simulcrypt, the following parameters must be defined: Service_port Read only. This field gives the port number on which the device receives data to inject. This value can be edited from the devices advanced parameters (Data injection page). If changed a device reboot is necessary. Data_port Number of the IP port on which the device is listening. Client_id Identification of the source device. This value must be identical to the one used on the injection side. Data_id, Stream_id This identification is for distinguishing different private components coming from the same injector. This value must be identical to the one used on the source side. This field is called Data id in version 2 of the standard and Stream id in its first version. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 279 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol Figure 4.84: Ethernet interface, TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol parameters 280 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 For the TCP DVB Simulcrypt protocol the parameters are: Service port Read only. This field gives the port number on which the device receives data to inject. This value can be edited from the devices advanced parameters (Data injection page). If changed a device reboot is necessary. Client id Identifier set on the DVB injector. In the case of an EMM channel, this identifier must take the SuperCAS_id parameter value supplied by the CAS (for SuperCAS_id definitions, see the standard ETSI TS 103 197 DVB: Head-end implementation of DVB SimulCrypt). Default value: 0 Data id, Stream_id This field is called Data id in version 2 of the standard and Stream id in its first version. Default value: 0 3. For the TS interface Figure 4.85: Entry of data component (TS input interface parameters) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 281 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application The Component selection area is used for setting the injection parameters TS input and Input PID. Note: The incident PID is replaced by the one supplied by the Operating Station (see Figure 4.77 page 271). The Incoming signalling area is used for programming the behaviour of the encoder with regard to incoming signalling. If Dropped is selected, this means that the stream- type information and the descriptors contained in the PMT and the SDT input tables of the incoming TS stream are not kept. The Stream_type value of the first tab ("General") is taken into account and the Edit additional PMT info... and Edit additional SDT info... commands are used for adding new descriptors. If Added to the local signalling is selected, this means that the stream-type information and the descriptors contained in the PMT and the SDT input tables are kept and added to the descriptors edited locally. The Stream_type value of the first tab ("General") is not used. Note: If a transiting service component is linked to a generated service via the "local" option for descriptor insertion, the list of descriptors mentioned will be associated with the component in both PMTs generated by the multiplexer (the descriptors associated with the component in the PMT of the original service are forgotten). In other words, the multi- plexer only generates one context per component, and the transiting component is assi- gned the modifications made when it is used as a linked component. 282 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The components thus redefined are displayed in the main window: Figure 4.86: Main window Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 283 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors The command for editing PMT (Programme Map Table) descriptors is used to associate descriptors with services or components. Descriptors must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300 468 Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems. PMT descriptors for a service , ,, , Procedure for editing PMT descriptors 1. Select the relevant service. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands. 3. Choose the Edit additional PMT info... command. Following this operation, a dialogue box will be displayed to add or remove descriptors and display or edit related parameters. Figure 4.87: Editing PMT descriptors Edit parameters... Remove service... Edit additional PMT info... Edit additional SDT info... Add components... 284 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 An identifier under 128 can be entered in the descriptor adding screen to enable insertion of any DVB or ISO descriptor which does not appear in the default list. If the identifier entered does not match a supported descriptor the descriptor editing screen is displayed for hexadecimal input of the descriptor. Figure 4.88: Adding a private descriptor 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 285 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application , ,, , Procedure for adding a descriptor 1. Click on Add... A dialogue box is then displayed to select the required descriptor type. Figure 4.89: Add a descriptor The drop-down list in the Standard option offers a choice between several descriptor types: audio_stream, copyright, data_broadcast_id, data_stream_alignment, hierarchy, IBP, language, maximum_bitrate, mosaic, multiplex_buffer_utilization, private_data_indicator, private_data_specifier, registration, service_move, smoothing_buffer, STD, stream_identifier, subtitling, system_clock, target_background_grid, teletext, video_stream and video_window. Note: It is possible to enter the three characters of the ISO 639 language codes for any language that is not available in the list. 2. Select the required descriptor. 3. Click on OK. Clicking on OK updates the selected descriptor type in the original dialogue box. 286 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4. Fill in the parameters then click on Add in the right-hand panel. Figure 4.90: Display of descriptor type with related parameters (example: language descriptor) 5. Click on OK. 6. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 287 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Data_broadcast_id descriptor Figure 4.91: Data_broadcast_id descriptor Data broadcast id This parameter identifies the data type transported by the component. Its value is between 0 and 65535 or can be selected from a list of preset values. The exhaustive list is available in the DVB ETR 162 standard. The default value is Asynchronous data stream. The preset values available are: Text Value Data pipe 0x0001 Asynchronous data stream 0x0002 Synchronous data stream 0x0003 Synchronised data stream 0x0004 Multi protocol encapsulation 0x0005 Data Carousel 0x0006 Object Carousel 0x0007 DVB ATM streams 0x0008 288 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 ID selector bytes The definition and the value of this byte field depend on the selected data broadcast id. Default value: blank Maximum number of bytes: 253 bytes. , ,, , Procedure for deleting a descriptor 1. Select the descriptor to be removed (the descriptor is displayed with a blue background). 2. Click on Remove. 3. Confirm your choice ("Yes") in the dialogue box displayed. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). , ,, , Procedure for editing/displaying descriptor parameters 1. Select the descriptor to be edited/displayed (the descriptor is displayed with a blue background). 2. If required, edit the parameters in the Parameters area. 3. Click on OK. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). PMT descriptors for a component , ,, , Procedure for editing PMT descriptors for a component 1. Select the relevant component. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component- specific commands. 3. Choose the Edit additional PMT info... command. Edit parameters... Remove component... Edit additional PMT info... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 289 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Following this command, a dialogue box appears identical to that in Figure 4.87 page 283. However, the descriptors listed relate to the selected component. It is possible to add and remove descriptors and edit their parameters as described above. 4.5.4.1.6 - SDT descriptors The command for editing SDT (Service Description Table) descriptors is used to associate descriptors with services: bouquet_name, country_availability, data_broadcast, linkage, ML_service_name, mosaic, NVOD_reference, private_data_specifier, stuffing, telephone and time_shifted_service. Descriptors must be added in compliance with the DVB standard set out in the reference document ETS 300 468 "Specification for Service Information (SI) in Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) systems". The procedures are similar to those described for the PMT descriptors (see section 4.5.4.1.5 - PMT descriptors page 283). 290 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.4.2 - Advanced Functions 4.5.4.2.1 - Shared components A shared component is a component which is linked to two or more services in the SI/PSI tables. Actually data of a shared component are not duplicated. The elementary stream is just indicated by the signalling of different services. A typical application of shared components is a live information service. For instance this service could be a news service that displays stock exchange quotes on the TV set in real time. To be accessible from every service these data must be broadcast into each TS of the network and referenced by each service. There are three methods of implementation: Figure 4.92: Principle of Shared Components In the first solution (case a), the elementary stream is duplicated for each service in the TS and is referenced as a private data component. The cost of this solution in terms of bandwidth is very high. The second way (case b) is to broadcast the elementary stream (ES) once in the TS. A private descriptor is used to reference the component. The decoder is able to interpret that descriptor and tune to the component. This solution is acceptable but not compatible with any remultiplexing operation since the component is not described in the SI/PSI signalling. Signalling E. Stream (a) Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3 PID 100 PID 101 PID 102 PID 100 PID 101 PID 102 Signalling E. Stream (b) Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3 PID 100 Signalling E. Stream (c) Srv 1 Srv 2 Srv 3 PID 100 PID 100 PID 100 PID 100 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 291 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application The last solution (case c) is to use the share component feature. The data are broadcast once and the component is described in SI/PSI signalling. Any type of component can be shared. , ,, , Procedure 1. Select a service. 2. Select the Add components... command. 3. Consult the list of components. 4. Check the Show shared components box to display all the proposed resources (including those already used in another service). 5. Select the components to share in the list. 6. Click on OK. Shared components are displayed like the other components in the main window. This means they can appear several times in the tree view. Notes: 1. When parameters of a shared component are changed, all the items of the list referring to the shared component are updated. This means that each parameter of a shared component is identical regardless of the service except for the PCR. This parameter can have different values according to the generated service that uses it. When a shared component is removed from a service, it is not removed from other services. Actually only the reference to this service is deleted. But when a shared component is only referenced by one service, it automatically becomes a non shared component. The remove command works exactly as it does for a non shared component. 2. A shared component can only be scrambled locally if all the transmitted instances of this component belong to the same access group. Thus, when a component belongs to two services and scrambling is only required for one of the services, then the component is transmitted in clear. 4.5.4.2.2 - Ghost components Ghost components are components broadcast by an encoder that are not referenced in SI or PSI tables. To recover a ghost component the receiver must know its PID. Since the PID is not present in SI/PSI signalling, the receiver and the transmitter must have a non standard mechanism to exchange the PID. This could be a private 292 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 data descriptor or a private table. Ghost components are used by some networks for testing purposes or to generate non DVB/ISO streams. Notes: 1. Ghost components cannot automatically be transmitted at the remultiplexing stage even if the multiplexer is set to pass all services. They must be explicitly indicated to get through the multiplexer. 2. Ghost components cannot carry the PCR. 3. If a component is a ghost component (non indicated in the outgoing stream), It does not be associated to a service. If a component is declared "ghost component" issued of a SRV1 service on the tributary, and the broadcast of the service SRV1 is authorised without stopping the component, the component is neither a ghost component because it describes in the PMT of the service SRV1. To avoid confusion for users who do not need this feature, the Ghost component item is hidden by default. To show this item and gain access to the ghost component facilities, select the Manage ghost components command in the pop-up menu of the Generated Services item. Figure 4.93: Add ghost components , ,, , Procedure 1. Select the Manage ghost components command in the menu attached to the Generated Services item. The icon appears in the tree structure. All the ghost components will be grouped under this entity. 2. Right mouse click to display the shortcut menu associated with the icon.
Add components... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 293 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 3. Select the Add components... command. 4. Select components as for a standard service. Only free components can be selected. Ghost components cannot be shared. Figure 4.94: Example of ghost component 4.5.4.2.3 - Inband command This command is not useful for this encoder type. 4.5.5 - TS input The TS input is found under Tributaries in the {Technical Configuration} application window. The filtering functions on this input are the same as those offered on a multiplexer. They are summarised in the diagram on the next page. The encoder TS input is only visible and can only be configured using the N41STSIN option. 294 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE Chapter 4 295 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual TS Input filtering: menu tree Input service_id: Input PID: Remove Drop an EMM service EMM_PID : Authorise an EMM service Remove EMM SERVICES STANDARD SERVICES Input service_id: Change service_id: Change service_type: Change service_name: Stop if bitrate >... Alarm if the bitrate <... Tributary selection used Edit filtering Pass/Stop all EMM Stop all EMM Pass all EMM Authorise a service to be transmitted Drop a service Service selection Signalling type Alarm if bitrate >... Alarm if the bitrate <... Reallocation authorisation Pass/Stop all services unused Stop all Pass all Stop all Pass all Authorize a component Input PID: Change PID: Stop if bitrate >... Alarm if the bitrate <... Drop a component Edit Filtering TRIBUTARY level SERVICE level COMPONENT level all SERVICES some SERVICES all COMPONENTS some COMPONENTS Pass/Stop all components EMM service selection EMM Edit filtering Input PID: Change PID: Stop if bitrate >... Alarm if the bitrate <... Authorise a service to be transmitted Input service_id: Pass/Stop all ECM If (Stop all EMM) If (Pass all EMM) If (Stop all services) If (Pass all services) Add a component 296 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 297 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application All types of filtering are possible: First level filtering: first level filtering provides global action on the TS input. The Unused command stops the TS input whilst the Used command lets the TS input stream through, applying the second, third and fourth level filtering conditions defined below. Second level filtering: global filtering conditions may be defined (Stop all or Pass all) on each of the following three entities: services, EMM data, access control data. For both the Services and EMM data entities, additional filters can be used to authorise or drop individual services and EMM flows: Authorise a service to be transmitted or Drop a service and Authorise an EMM service or Drop an EMM service commands. Other facilities are also offered, e.g. checking incident TS stream identity (not implemented), selecting incident table processing mode, authorising automatic reallocation of component PIDs in the event of conflict, monitoring the TS input bitrate. Monitoring allows the TS input to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator. Third level filtering: the identification parameters for authorised services (service_id, service_type, service_name) and authorised EMM flows (EMM_PID) can be redefined. In addition, service components are filtered at this level; filtering may be global (Stop all or Pass all), or specific (Add a component or Drop a component). Other facilities are also proposed, e.g. suspending or starting up transmission of a transit service, attaching locally generated components to a transit service, monitoring bitrates for incoming services. Monitoring allows incident services to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator. Fourth level filtering: all functions affecting components are grouped at this level, i.e.: redefining a component PID. suspending or starting up transmission of a transit component, monitoring bitrates for incoming components. Monitoring allows incident components to be stopped if bitrate is exceeded with notification to the operator. 298 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.5.1 - First level filtering: stopping/passing the TS input , ,, , Procedure to stop or pass the input TS 1. In the main window, select the tributary (TS); 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: 3. Choose the Used command (or Unused as the case may be). Note: with the Used command, the data contained in the input TS is found in the outgoing multiplex, subject to the second, third and fourth level filtering conditions defined below. 4. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 4.5.5.2 - Second level filtering: filtering conditions on the tributary, selecting services and EMM flows 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary The commands linked to tributary filtering conditions are only available if the TS input is not stopped (the Used command must be ticked in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary). , ,, , Procedure for editing the general filtering conditions on the tributary 1. In the main window, select the tributary; Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... (Drop a service...) Authorise an EMM service... (Drop an EMM service...) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 299 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: 3. Choose the Edit filtering conditions... command. A dialogue box appears to input filtering conditions: Figure 4.95: Editing of general filtering conditions for the tributary Description of fields: In the Transport stream checks area Expected original network id and Expected TS id Identity of the expected flow. If the input flow does not match the expected identity, Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... Drop a service... (Authorise an EMM service...) Drop an EMM service... 300 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 the encoder stops transmission. Each TS is identified by a specific TS_id in the original network which is in turn identified by an original_network_id. Not currently implemented. Signalling Type The encoder load can be reduced by requesting that only part of the incoming signalling is managed. There are five modes available: No signalling: all signalling arriving on the input is ignored. When this mode is enabled, all filtering instructions are ignored as there is no analysis of signalling. Consequently, the filters placed on this input are not implemented. Data received on this input can only be used to define TS components. Default: the mode selected is the same as that set for output (see editing of encoder advanced parameters). ISO signalling: Only ISO tables are analysed. DVB tables are ignored (SDT and EIT). If the multiplexer is configured to generate a DVB output signal, the current SDT is generated by default by the encoder by automatic creation of service and service provider names. DVB restricted: ISO and DVB tables are analysed except for EIT p/f and EIT s tables which are still filtered. The current SDT table is produced from the data elements available in the current incoming SDT. DVB signalling: ISO and DVB tables are analysed. The SDT and EIT tables for each service are retransmitted if the filtering instructions authorise transmission of the service. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 301 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application In the Default filtering modes area Services Pass all: All incident TS services are transmitted. However, unwanted services can be removed one by one from the outgoing multiplex using the Drop a service... command in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see section 4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services page 303). Stop all: All incident TS services are stopped. However, required services can be added one by one to the outgoing multiplex using the Authorise a service to be transmitted... command in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see section 4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services page 303). EMMs Pass all: All EMM flows from the incident TS are transmitted. However, unwanted EMM flows can be removed one by one from the outgoing multiplex using the Drop an EMM service... command in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see section 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows page 306). Stop all: All incident TS EMM flows are stopped. However, required EMM flows can be added one by one to the outgoing multiplex using the Authorise an EMM service... command in the shortcut menu attached to the tributary (see section 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows page 306). ECMs Filtering is applied to all data linked to access control on the relevant TS input, i.e.: PIDs containing ECM channels; CA_descriptors placed in the service PMTs. Pass all: all data linked to access control is transmitted. Stop all: all data linked to access control is stopped. 302 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 If the signal is scrambled, only the ECMs and their references in the signalling are removed. In the Case of PID conflict area PID reallocation authorised If a transit component PID comes into conflict with a locally generated service PID, the encoder reallocates another available PID value. PID reallocation not authorised If a transit component PID comes into conflict with a locally generated service PID, the encoder stops the component and raises an alarm to the operating terminal. Notes: 1. Generated components have priority over transiting components. So, when generating a component whose PID enters into conflict with that of a transiting component, the latter is stopped (if reallocation is barred on the tributary) or its PID is reallocated. A transiting component linked to a locally generated service is not considered as a gene- rated component. 2. It is advisable not to change the authorised/not authorised reallocation mode during normal operation and to always keep the same mode. In PID reallocation authorised mode, the way in which PIDs are reallocated is directly linked to the order in which they are detected in the incoming stream. It is therefore not surprising that reallocation can differ between a redundant device and its back up device. 3. The device accepts both services with a PCR carried by a specific PID and reallocation of the supported PID as required; however, one case of reallocation has not been solved. take the following example: S1 (Vid = 200, Aud = 201, PCR = 400), S2 (Vid = 300, Aud = 301, PCR = 400), S3 (Vid = 400, Aud = 401, PCR = 400). If no specific reallocation instruction is given, the output signal will be correct. But if video 400 to video 500 reallocation is required, the output signal will be as follows: S1 (Vid = 200, Aud = 201, PCR = 400), S2 (Vid = 300, Aud = 301, PCR = 400), S3 (Vid = 500, Aud = 401, PCR = 500). In fact the result depends on the arrival and processing order of the PMTs. The problem does not arise if the PCR is not carried by a component. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 303 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application In the Bitrate monitoring area Drop this input if bitrate exceeds Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. If exceeded, the input is dropped. and raise an alarm if bitrate is lower than: An alarm is raised if the bitrate is under the specified value. 4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 4.5.5.2.2 - Selection of services Selection of transit services depends on the tributary filtering conditions defined in the previous section. If the (Default filtering modes) Services Pass all radio button is enabled, all input TS services are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted services can be removed one by one. , ,, , Procedure for removing services belonging to the input TS from the end multiplex 1. In the main window, select the tributary; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: 3. Choose the Drop a service... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the service to be removed. Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... Drop a service... Authorise an EMM service... (Drop an EMM service...) 304 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.96: Selection of the service to be removed 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Figure 4.97: Main window - Removing a service Conversely, if the (Default filtering modes) Services Stop all radio button is enabled, no input TS service is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, required services may be added one by one. , ,, , Procedure for adding services belonging to the input TS to the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the tributary; 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 305 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: 3. Choose the Authorise a service to be transmitted... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the service to be added. Figure 4.98: Selection of the service to be added Note: In the Bitrate supervision area, when the case Stop the service if its bitrate upper than is selected, the complete service is not stopped. Only some components are barred until the desired value of the bitrate reached. 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... (Drop a service...) (Authorise an EMM service...) Drop an EMM service... 306 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Figure 4.99: Main window - Adding a service 4.5.5.2.3 - Selection of EMM flows As with services, selection of transit EMM flows depends on the tributary filtering conditions defined in section 4.5.5.2.1 - General filtering conditions on the tributary page 298. If the (Default filtering modes) EMMs Pass all radio button is enabled, all the input TS EMM flows are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted EMM flows can be removed one by one. , ,, , Procedure for removing EMM flows belonging to the input TS from the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the tributary; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... (Drop a service...) (Authorise an EMM service...) Drop an EMM service... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 307 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 3. Choose the Drop an EMM service... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the EMM service to be removed. Figure 4.100: Selection of the EMM service to be removed 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Figure 4.101: Main window - Removing an EMM service 308 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Conversely, if the (Default filtering modes) EMMs Stop all radio button is enabled, no input TS EMM flow is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, required EMM flows can be added one by one. , ,, , Procedure for adding EMM flows belonging to the input TS to the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the tributary; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the tributary-specific commands: 3. Choose the Authorise an EMM service... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the EMM service to be added. Figure 4.102: Selection of the EMM service to be added 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Unused TS input Used TS input Edit filtering conditions... Authorise a service to be transmitted... (Drop a service...) Authorise an EMM service... (Drop an EMM service...) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 309 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Figure 4.103: Main window - Adding an EMM service 4.5.5.3 - Third level filtering: filtering conditions on services 4.5.5.3.1 - General filtering conditions These conditions only apply to services added individually using the Authorise a service to be transmitted... command. They are used for: suspending or restarting transmission of the service, global filtering of all service components (Stop all components or Pass all components), changing service identification parameters (useful when forming a new multiplex or when there is a service conflict during remultiplexing), checking that bitrate is not exceeded for the incident service, attaching local private data to an input TS service during the remultiplexing operation. , ,, , Procedure for editing general filtering conditions for a service 1. In the main window, select the relevant service; 310 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: 3. Choose the Edit filtering parameters... command. A dialogue box appears for input of filtering conditions. Figure 4.104: Editing of general filtering conditions for a service Description of fields: The Service selection area consists of the following fields: Input service id Service identification, Browse Command displaying the list of services present in the input TS flow, Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... (Authorise a component to be transmitted...) Drop a component... Add components... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 311 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application On air / Off air / Stopped Command starting or suspending transmission of the service. When transmission is suspended (Off air selected), the Off air message appears in the applications main window opposite the service concerned. The Default component filtering mode area consists of the following fields: Pass all components All service components are transmitted. However, unwanted components can be removed one by one from the outgoing multiplex using the Drop a component command in the shortcut menu attached to the service (see section 4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components). Stop all components All service components are stopped. However, required components can be added one by one to the outgoing multiplex using the Authorise a component to be transmitted command in the shortcut menu attached to the service (see section 4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components). The Modifications in output TS area consists of the following fields: Change service id Number of the service in the outgoing multiplex, Change service type Type of service in the outgoing multiplex. Change service name Name of the service in the outgoing multiplex. The Bitrate supervision area consists of the following fields: Stop the service if its bitrate higher than Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. When this is exceeded, the service is stopped. 312 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 and raise an alarm if bitrate is lower than: An alarm is raised if the bitrate is under the specified value. 4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 4.5.5.3.2 - Individual filtering of components Selection of transit services depends on the service filtering conditions defined in the previous section. If the (Default component filtering mode) Pass all components radio button is enabled, all components of the service concerned are found in the outgoing multiplex. However, unwanted components can be removed one by one. , ,, , Procedure for removing components belonging to an input TS service from the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the relevant service; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: 3. Choose the Drop a component... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the component to be removed. Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... (Authorise a component to be transmitted...) Drop a component... Add components... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 313 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Figure 4.105: Selection of the component to be removed 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Figure 4.106: Main window - Removing a component Conversely, if the (Default component filtering mode) Stop all components radio button is enabled, no component of the service concerned is found in the outgoing multiplex. However, required components can be added one by one. , ,, , Procedure for adding components belonging to the input TS to the outgoing multiplex 1. In the main window, select the relevant service; 314 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: 3. Choose the Authorise a component to be transmitted... command. A dialogue box is displayed allowing selection of the component to be added. Figure 4.107: Selection of the component to be added 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... Authorise a component to be transmitted... (Drop a component...) Add components... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 315 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Figure 4.108: Main window - Adding a component 316 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.5.5.3.3 - Attaching components It is possible to add local private data components to an input TS service during the remultiplexing operation. The following example shows how to configure the encoder for using attached components. In the example, the encoder is to transmit all the services coming from tributary 1 and add to the input TS service 500 a private data component, the PID of which is 774.
Figure 4.109: Attached components The attached components are private data that can be input by either the Ethernet link or the serial link. Note: The attached components cannot carry PCR. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 317 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application , ,, , Procedure 1. In the main window, select the relevant service. Note: For tributaries with the default mode Pass all components, define a positive service filter in Authorise a service to be transmitted... to specify the service. Figure 4.110: Positive service filter "Authorise a service..." 318 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.111: "Authorise a service..." dialogue box 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: 3. Choose the Add components... command to attach the component. Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... (Authorise a component to be transmitted...) (Drop a component...) Add components... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 319 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Figure 4.112: Add components... command A dialogue box is displayed for you to select the component to be added. 320 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.113: Add components... dialogue box 4. Click on OK to confirm the selection made in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). Figure 4.114: Main window - attached component 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 321 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application Figure 4.115: Dialogue box, edition of parameters Notes: 1. The device does not know how to change the PID PMT in the PMT table of the transi- ting service. Thus, the Contains the PCR is greyed out. 2. When a scrambled component is attached to a service (TS service or generated service), only the CA_descriptor corresponding to the component can be recovered. Component scrambling must therefore be performed at component level and not service level. 4.5.5.3.4 - Removing a service , ,, , Procedure 1. In the main window, select the relevant service; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the service-specific commands: Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... (Authorise a component to be transmitted...) (Drop a component...) Add components... 322 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3. Choose the Remove this condition... command. A message appears to confirm removal of the service. Figure 4.116: Confirmation request 4. Click on OK or Cancel. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 4.5.5.4 - Fourth level filtering: filtering conditions on components 4.5.5.4.1 - General filtering conditions These conditions only apply to components added individually to the outgoing multiplex via the Authorise a component to be transmitted... command. They are used for: changing component identification parameters (useful when forming a new multiplex or when there is a PID conflict during remultiplexing), suspending or restarting component transmission, checking that the bitrate is not exceeded for the incident component. , ,, , Procedure for editing general filtering conditions for a component 1. In the main window, select the component; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component- specific commands: 3. Choose the Edit filtering parameters... command. Edit filtering parameters... Remove this condition... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 323 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application A dialogue box appears to input filtering conditions. Figure 4.117: Editing of general filtering conditions for a component Description of fields: In the Selection area Input component PID Identification of the component, Browse Command displaying the list of components present in the service, Off air Command suspending transmission of the component. When transmission is suspended (button enabled), the Off air message appears in the applications main window opposite the component concerned. In the Multiplexing area Change PID PID in the outgoing multiplex. 324 Chapter 4 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 In the Bitrate supervision area Stop the component if its bitrate is higher than Maximum authorised bitrate threshold. If this is exceeded, the component is stopped. and raise an alarm if bitrate is lower than: An alarm is raised if the bitrate is under the specified value. 4. Enter the various parameters in the dialogue box. 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 4.5.5.4.2 - Removing a component , ,, , Procedure 1. In the main window, select the component; 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the component- specific commands:. 3. Choose the Remove this condition... command. A message appears to confirm removal of the component. Figure 4.118: Confirmation request 4. Click on OK or Cancel. Edit filtering parameters Remove this condition... 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 325 4.5 - {Technical Configuration} application 5. Click on the button to activate the new configuration (or alternatively, click on the button to cancel the changes). 326 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.6 - {MONITORING & REDUNDANCY} APPLICATION Foreword: Before starting the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application, it is recom- mended to activate the {Equipment Interface} application (servex.exe), see note in section 4.3 - page 170. It is recommended to activate this application before using any other operating software applications. To modify parameters in the application, do not forget to lock the terminal for the current application ( ). The commands are then accessible. The main window background is white. The language used for the interface can be selected. Screens are available in French or English (see section 4.1.3 - Setting the interface language page 160). 4.6.1 - Purpose and scope of the application The {Monitoring & Redundancy} application allows supervision of the rate of services and their components and also transmits encoder alarms. Maintenance commands are also available to reboot a device, display device information (general and internal information) and upgrade its configuration. Note: The redundancy function, as suggested in the application name, does not concern the "Stand-Alone" environment. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 327 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application The following sections present the screen layout and the different functions offered by the application. 4.6.2 - Screen layout Figure 4.119: Screen section 4.6.2 Screen layout section 4.6.3 Alarm supervision section 4.6.4 Supervision of services and data flow section 4.6.5 Save all/Load all commands section 4.6.6 Maintenance commands section 4.6.7 Audible warning of alarms menu bar tool bar main window Alarms window Equipment window Services and data flow window Redundancy report window 328 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Menu bar Menu Command Comment Quit Quit the application. Refresh Reserved. View Alarms Display the Alarms window. Automatic redundancy report Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context. Services and data flow Display the Services and data flow window. Hierarchical view Display the Equipment window in Hierarchical view format. Physical view Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context. Tool Lock all Lock the operating station to enable device parameters to be edited. See section 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details. Unlock all Unlock the operating station. See 4.1.6 - Device locking/unlocking for details. Save all... Save all configurations including any comment to file. Load all... Restore a full configuration previously saved by Save all... Options Sound... Enable/disable the terminal audible warning signal. Window Cascade Tile vertical Tile horizontal Arrange icons Close all views Choice of window arrangement. Help About... Display software version. Operating manual... Open on-line user manual. See 4.1.4 - On-line manuals page 162 for details. Alarm help Open {Alarm Help} application. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 329 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application Tool bar Button Comment Quit the application. Cancel the modifications and revert to the last saved configuration (i.e. the active configuration). Display the Alarms window. Display the Automatic redundancy report. Display the Services and data flow window. Display the Equipment window in Hierarchical view format. Display the Equipment window in Sites or Racks view format. Not applicable in "Stand-Alone" context. Lock the terminal for the current application. The commands are accessible. The main window background is white. Unlock the terminal for the current application. The commands are not acces- sible (only consultation is possible). The main window background is grey. 330 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Main window To show information concerning alarms and service and rate supervision, the main window can display up to three separate windows at the same time: the Alarms window, the Equipment window and the Services and data flow window. Figure 4.120: Tree structure of windows and views " " " " Alarms window This window is opened by clicking on the button or choosing the Alarms command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar. It features three pages displayed by clicking on the corresponding Active, Released and Masked tabs. All the alarms sent by the encoder appear highlighted in yellow (plus one in blue). Alarms window Services and data flow window Equipment window Hierarchical view Physical view Sites view Racks view or (not Automatic redundancy report window in context) applicable "Stand-Alone 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 331 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application Figure 4.121: Alarms window The alarm highlighted in blue corresponds to the alarm to which the shortcut menus apply. These menus are displayed with a right mouse click. A detailed explanation of the alarm supervision function and the three Alarm pages can be found in section 4.6.3 - Alarm supervision page 334. " " " " Equipment window This window shows the encoder supervised by the operating station, with three mutually exclusive views. a) Hierarchical view: This view may be accessed by clicking on the button or choosing the Hierarchical view command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar. The icon symbolising the equipment is displayed in a different way depending on the equipment alarm status: grey icon: correct operation (no alarm). flashing red icon: alarm activated. non-flashing red icon: alarm released by Operator. A menu is also associated with the device, providing the following commands: the following maintenance commands: encoder reboot, consultation of device information (general and internal information) and configuration upgrade, Major alarm Minor alarm Encoder name Origin of fault 332 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 release of alarms or cancellation of release, lock or unlock the device (see section 4.1 - Ergonomic aspects for an explanation of this function). Note: Apart from the device information command which is always available, these commands are only visible if the station is locked ( ). Figure 4.122: Equipment - Hierarchical devices view b) Sites view: This view may be accessed by clicking on the button or choosing the Physical view command in the drop-down View menu on the menu bar. This view shows the various sites or rooms supervised by the Operating Station. It is only used in a "System" environment and is not proposed in "Stand-alone" mode. It is not described in this manual. c) Racks view: This view may be accessed from the Sites view. It is only used in a "System" environment and is not proposed in "Stand-alone" mode. It is therefore not described in more detail in this manual. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 333 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application " " " " Services and data flow window This window may be accessed by clicking on or choosing the Services and data flow command in the drop-down View menu in the menu bar. The window consists of two sub-windows. The first sub-window displays the input services and rates on TS input. The second sub-window displays the output services and bit rates supplied by the encoder. Component bitrates are measured every second in the device. The bitrates fed back to the operating station appear fixed whereas in reality they fluctuate. Figure 4.123: "Services and data flow" window The tree view has three levels: at level one, the encoder (in the "Input services..." subwindow) and the Transport Stream conveying the set of services (in the "Output services..." subwindow). It shows the maximum rate allowed depending on the output frequency of the encoder and the size of the TS packets (see section 4.5.3.1.2 - Output item page 194) as well as the current rate. at level two, the services of the selected device with data flow information. The representation of services gives the name of the service, service identifier and service data flow. at level three, the components of a service with data flow information. The representation of components depends on their scrambling (the icon is greyed out if the component is scrambled). Information given for components includes component type (Video, Audio, etc.), PID (in decimal and hexadecimal) and component data flow. 334 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.6.3 - Alarm supervision 4.6.3.1 - Alarms window The Alarms window contains three pages: active alarms (Active tab), alarms not treated by the operator,, released alarms (Released tab), alarms seen and treated by the operator, masked alarms (Masked tab), alarms seen but not treated by the operator. Each tab text contains the number of alarms listed in each page in brackets. When a device is selected in the hierarchical view, all alarms related to the device in the Alarms window are coloured yellow except the first in the list which takes the selection colour. " " " " Active page This page displays the active alarms of all devices. An active alarm is represented by: an icon which specifies the alarm severity level (minor, major), the alarm type identifier, the device which triggered the alarm, the textual description of the alarm. A shortcut menu is attached to this page for the selected alarm to trigger it in released or masked status. Figure 4.124: Active alarms page 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 335 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application Description of shortcut commands associated with an active alarm Release This command releases an alarm. The alarm is deleted from the list of active alarms and added to the list of released alarms. When the alarm falls, it is removed from the list. When it next rises, it becomes active again. Release all active alarms This command releases all active alarms. See the Release command. Mask This command masks the selected alarm for the device concerned. The alarm is no longer used when assessing the status of the device. The {Event Log} application however continues to manage the masked alarm (i.e. monitor its fall). When the command is run, the alarm is moved from the list of active alarms to the list of masked alarms. Mask for all devices This command masks the selected alarm for all devices. The alarm is no longer used when assessing the status of the devices. The selected alarm is identified by (AlarmId and AlarmIdExtension). The alarms concerned are all deleted from the list of active alarms and added to the list of masked alarms. 336 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 " " " " Released page This page lists the alarms released by the Operator. A released alarm is an alarm present on a device which the Operator has seen and dealt with. As long as the alarm does not fall, it continues to be displayed on this page. Figure 4.125: Released alarms page Description of shortcut commands associated with a released alarm Reactivate This command reactivates a selected released alarm. The alarm is deleted from the list of released alarms and added to the list of active alarms. Reactivate all released alarms This command reactivates all released alarms. Mask the selected alarm See Description of shortcut commands associated with an active alarm page 335. Mask the selected alarm for all devices See Description of shortcut commands associated with an active alarm page 335. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 337 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application " " " " Masked page Masked alarms are represented by: an icon which specifies the alarm severity level (minor, major); the alarm type identifier; the name of the device which triggered the alarm or All devices showing that the alarm is masked for all devices which generate it; a complete description of the alarm. A shortcut menu is attached to the page for the selected alarm. Figure 4.126: Masked alarms page Description of shortcut commands associated with a masked alarm Unmask This command unmasks a selected alarm. This alarm is deleted from the list of masked alarms. Unmask all alarms This command unmasks all masked alarms in one command. 338 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.6.3.2 - Equipment window The Equipment window can be used to release all alarms or reactivate all released alarms for a device in one mouse click. , ,, , Procedure to release all alarms for the device 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Release alarms command. This has the following effects: The audible warning on the operating station is silenced, All alarm signals from the device are saved in the alarms list, In the Equipment window, the icon representing the device in alarm condition remains red, but does not flash. , ,, , Procedure to reactivate all alarms 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...) (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 339 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application 3. Choose the Activate any released alarm command. If the device is still faulty, the alarm signals are reactivated (audible alarm reactivation and flashing icon). If the device is no longer faulty, the alarms disappear from the alarms list. 340 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.6.4 - Supervision of services and data flow , ,, , Procedure to view the services and components at the encoder input (tributary) 1. Display the Services and data flow window. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. Note: The Monitor stuffing bitrate..., Drop all same level items and Collapse all same level items commands are irrelevant for the DBE 4110 encoder. 3. Choose the View input services and data flow... command. A dialogue box allowing the tributary (TS) to be selected is displayed. Figure 4.127: Selection of the tributary to monitor 4. Select the TS and click on OK. The services and components are displayed in the window (or in a second sub-window if the first sub-window is already open for the output services and components). View input services and data flow... View output services and data flow... Monitor stuffing bitrate... Drop all same level items Collapse all same level items 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 341 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application Figure 4.128: Service and data flow (input only) , ,, , Procedure to view the services and components sent from the encoder 1. Display the Services and data flow window. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the View output services and data flow... command. View input services and data flow... View output services and data flow... Monitor stuffing bitrate... Drop all same level items Collapse all same level items 342 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 A dialogue box will be displayed for you to select the device from which the output services are sent. Figure 4.129: Selection of the device for displaying output services Click on OK and the services and data flow will be displayed in the main window (or in a second sub-window if the first sub-window is already open for the services and input components). Figure 4.130: Service and data flow (output only) Note: The list is cut if the length is upper than seven pages.That can happen if the service name is too long or if the number of services is very important. It is true for the incoming services. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 343 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application . Figure 4.131: Service and data flow (input and output) 4.6.5 - Save all/Load all commands The Save all/load all commands allow to save a new configuration or recover a configuration. The Save all command is available in the Tool menu in the {Technical configuration} application. Please refer to the note page 187. 344 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.6.6 - Maintenance commands The maintenance commands currently available concern device reboots, consultation of device information (general and internal information) and configuration upgrades. , ,, , Procedure to reboot the device 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands: 3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command. Notes: 1. Maintenance commands are only available if the station is locked (with button or shortcut Lock device command). 2. The following maintenance commands are reserved for use with a Channel Controller: Upgrade all nominal devices configuration..., Save in PCMCIA card, Off-line status, Maintenance status, Force configuration... and Load all configuration for MCC... They are therefore not relevant to Stand-Alone mode. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...) Information... Internal information... Reboot device Upgrade configuration... (...) (...) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 345 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application 4. Choose the Reboot device command and confirm your choice in the dialogue box displayed. , ,, , Procedure to get device information 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command. 4. Choose the Information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains three tabs for displaying general information about the device, information about boards and information about options in turn. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...) Information... Internal information... Reboot device Upgrade configuration... (...) (...) 346 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.132: Device information (1/3) Figure 4.133: Device information 2/3 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 347 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application Figure 4.134: Device information 3/3 , ,, , Procedure to get internal device information 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...) 348 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command. 4. Choose the Internal information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains information on internal use of resources such as the maximum number of sub-tables, the number of sub-tables used and the number of free sub-tables. The same information is displayed for sections, packets, ECM flows, etc. Figure 4.135: Internal device information , ,, , Procedure to upgrade configuration This command is used to format version 6.5 configuration files as version 7.0 files (current version). This operation is required to enable the next software upgrade (version "7.0" to "7.1") without interrupting programmes, since a version 7.1 device is capable of reading configurations edited in version 7.0 but not those edited with version 6.5 (unless the upgrade operation described above has been performed). Information... Internal information... Reboot device Upgrade configuration... (...) (...) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 4 349 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application 1. Select the device in the Equipment window (Hierarchical view). 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Maintenance commands... command. 4. Choose the Upgrade configuration... command. The following confirmation request will be displayed: Figure 4.136: Confirmation request 5. Confirm the operation. (...) Maintenance commands... Release alarms Activate any released alarm Lock device (...) Information... Internal information... Reboot device Upgrade configuration... (...) (...) 350 Chapter 4 4.6 - {Monitoring & Redundancy} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.6.7 - Audible warning of alarms An audible warning is given by the operating station as soon as an alarm signal is sent by the device. To deactivate the audible warning, it is necessary to: remove the device fault, or release the alarm on the Operating Station, or disable the audible alarm using the Options/Sound command from the menu bar in the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application. Figure 4.137: Sound command in the menu bar Chapter 4 351 4.7 - {Download} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 4.7 - {DOWNLOAD} APPLICATION 4.7.1 - Purpose and scope of the application The {Download} application is used for firmware downloading allowing on-site updating of boards. The following sections display the screen layout and the different functions available with the application. 4.7.2 - Screen layout Figure 4.138: Download screen section 4.7.2 Screen layout section 4.7.3 Procedure section 4.7.4 Additional commands menu bar tool bar main window 352 Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The functions are represented by the menu bar and the tool bar. Menu bar. Tool bar. Menu Command Comment File Open... Browse package or firmware. Exit... Exit the application. Download Start... Download firmware on selected device. Stop... Stop downloading. Help About Display software version. Button Comment Quit the application. Browse package or firmware. Add a device Download firmware on selected device. Stop downloading Chapter 4 353 4.7 - {Download} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 4.7.3 - Procedure The procedure to follow is described below and divided into three parts: 1. Before downloading: Declare the device and establish a connection. Consult the "Information" window to find out the current version of the boards. Load the firmware to download. The files are provided on CD-ROM. Configure the download operation for the relevant device by selecting the following tasks: downloading and/or memory bank toggling and/or device reboot. 2. Downloading: Start downloading. 3. After downloading: Consult the downloading report. 4.7.3.1 - Before downloading " Declare and connect device First method: In the tool bar, Click on the button. A dialogue box will be displayed for you to enter the IP address. Figure 4.139: Add a device (1/2) This function allows the encoder to be displayed in the main window as in Figure 4.140. 354 Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Second method: In the shortcut menu (first tab Devices), 1. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 2. Choose the New device... command to add the encoder in the main window. 3. The new device is displayed in the main window, as in the following figure: Figure 4.140: Add a device (2/2) " Get information about the device This function provides information about the devices identity, the boards it contains and the installed options. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. New device... Reach/Refresh... Information Configure download... Start download... Stop download... Reboot... Toggle boot space... Log... Delete... Chapter 4 355 4.7 - {Download} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 3. Choose the Information... command. The dialogue box displayed contains three tabs for displaying general information about the device, information about boards and information about options in turn. Figure 4.141: Information (1/3) Figure 4.142: Information (2/3) 356 Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.143: Information (3/3) " Select the firmware 1. Click on the second tab Firmware, 2. In the tool bar, click on the button. 3. Choose the package(s) or the firmware to download. Note: 1. A package consists of several firmware. 2. The package(s) is (are) provided on CD-ROM. 3. For SSEB and AMuSE boards, the firmware files are identified by the following extensions: SSEB board .tes and .ssb, AMuSE board: .amb and .fp1. Chapter 4 357 4.7 - {Download} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual The selected files are listed in the main window: Figure 4.144: Firmware downloading " " " " Configure download This function is used to list the files to download and the actions to be carried out after a download: memory bank toggling. The SSEB software is stored in a flash memory bank. SSEB has two memory banks, which allows the user to download a new software release via Ethernet while keeping the former one as a backup in case of trouble. device reboot. Some parameter changes need a device reboot to be taken into account. Note: If the firmware is not selected, the Download Configuration window does not display any tasks or download log. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Configure download... command. 4. Select the firmware to download and/or toggle by clicking on the line. 5. For device rebooting, click on the box at the bottom-left of Figure 4.145 page 358. 358 Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 . Figure 4.145: Firmware downloading (tasks) 4.7.3.2 - Downloading This function is used to start up downloading of the selected devices. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 5. Choose the Start download... command in the shortcut menu (or the button on the toolbar or the Download/Start... command in the menu bar). The following dialogue box is displayed for confirming the downloading operation. Figure 4.146: Downloading confirmation Chapter 4 359 4.7 - {Download} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Downloading progress is shown as in the figure below: Figure 4.147: Downloading in progress 4.7.3.3 - After downloading " Log... command This function allows the operator to consult the downloading report for the selected device. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Log... command. Figure 4.148: Download log 360 Chapter 4 4.7 - {Download} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.7.4 - Additional commands " Delete... command This function is used to remove the encoder in the Devices window. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Delete... command and click on OK to confirm in the dialogue box displayed. " Reach/Refresh... command This function is used to establish the connection with the encoder after a reboot. This command is greyed out if the connection is established. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Reach/Refresh... command. " Stop download... command This function is used to stop encoder downloading. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Stop download... command. or in the tool bar, click on the button. " Toggle boot space... command This function is used to toggle the active flash memory bank. 1. Select the device. Chapter 4 361 4.7 - {Download} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Toggle boot space... command. Note: Before toggling, ensure that the content of the inactive flash memory bank is intact. This is not the case if downloading has been stopped (for any reason). The software in the inactive flash memory bank is then corrupt and should not be used. " Reboot... command This function is used to reboot the encoder. 1. Select the device. 2. Right mouse click to activate the shortcut menu containing the device-specific commands. 3. Choose the Reboot... command. 362 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.8 - {EVENT LOG} APPLICATION 4.8.1 - Principles of the {Event Log} application The purpose of this paragraph is to list all the functions of the {Event Log} application. 4.8.1.1 - Event " " " " Event types The event types displayed are as follows: rising alarm; falling alarm; reboots; device connections; device disconnections; device configuration changes (activations); service switching (to replacing) by INBAND command; service switching (to regular) by INBAND command. " " " " Paired events Some events can be grouped into pairs. Paired events are: rising and falling alarm; service switching to replacing and regular by INBAND command; setup and release of connections with devices. " " " " Parameters displayed Each event is displayed with the following parameters: a record number; an event identifier (event_id); a sub-identifier (event_extension); the name of the device which caused the event; Chapter 4 363 4.8 - {Event Log} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual the text describing the event; the date and local time of event occurrence; the duration (this parameter is significant only for rising alarm events). 4.8.1.2 - View configuration functions These functions facilitate event viewing by displaying just some of the information according to operator-defined criteria. " " " " Sorting Sorting consists of changing the order in which events are displayed in the list. Two sort options are available: sorting by record number; sorting by date and time. " " " " Filtering Filtering consists of defining events to be displayed on the screen. Those displayed satisfy the following criteria: they belong to event identifier lists; they come from given devices; they fall between two dates set by the Operator. " " " " Masking This function is used to mask the display of certain untimely events. These events are not deleted, they are simply no longer visible. " " " " Searching This function is used to move the cursor in the view of the current event to the event with which it is paired. If the search fails (the paired event is not present or not visible on account of the filter applied), an error message notifies the operator that the command has failed. 4.8.1.3 - Event exporting It is now possible to export the list of events to a text file. Any given event is represented over one line, each field of the event being delimited by a tabulation. 364 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Only events visible in the application are exported and not the entire base. The resulting text file can then be used from a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel). 4.8.1.4 - Miscellaneous In the {Event Log} application a text displayed in the status bar informs the operator of event collection status. 4.8.2 - Screen layout " " " " Title bar The title bar features the icon associated with the application as well as its name and the name of the open event log file. " " " " Menu bar Menu Command Comment File Open... Open an event log which can be the current log or a log archived during the week. Open current... Open the current event log. Open previous... Open one of the seven event logs archived during the week. Export... Export the open event log in text format. Quit Quit the application. View Refresh Refresh the view following receipt of new events. Select events... Customise event display by applying masking filters to: display certain event types only, display certain alarms only, display events between two dates, display events relating to certain devices. All events Display all events without changing the configuration of any filter defined with the View/Select events... command. Selected events... Apply the filter defined with the View/Select events... command to the event view. Chapter 4 365 4.8 - {Event Log} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual " " " " Tool bar This is a quick-access command bar featuring icons associated with the most frequently used commands. Just click on the relevant icon to access the command. " " " " Status bar The status bar displays general information which the user may require at any time. This bar features: a description of the commands associated with menus; an indicator of the selection applied to the base: All events All the events of the file are displayed; Selected events Filtering criteria have been applied and not all events are necessarily displayed. the number of the record selected and the total number of events displayed. When Tools Report ... Display a statistical report on the open event log. Calc durations... Calculate the duration between a rising alarm and a falling alarm or a device reboot. Help About ... Display the software version. Operating manual Access to on-line versions of manuals installed on the Operating Station. Button Comment Quit the application. This button has the same effect as the File/Quit command. Open an event log which can be the current log or a log archived during the week. This button has the same effect as the File/Open... command. Indicator showing that new events have arrived in the database. Click on this icon to refresh the display. This button has the same effect as the Refresh... command. Mask the display of certain events. This button has the same effect as the Select events... command. 366 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 filtering criteria are applied, the total is different from the number of events contained in the file; event collection status: No event collection The {Equipment Interface} application has not been run, the icon flashes to signal a problem. If the icon is not visible the {Equipment Interface} application is open but event collection is not enabled.; Collecting events The {Equipment Interface} application is open and set to collect events. a simulator mode indicator: <space> Simulator mode is disabled; Simulator mode Simulator mode is enabled. Chapter 4 367 4.8 - {Event Log} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual " " " " Main window (table of events) Figure 4.149: Table of events The main view of the application displays the table of events contained in the event log being consulted. The Operator can drag and drop column titles to change column display order. The parameters displayed for each event are: the record number; an icon according to event type; two numbers (id and ext) providing unique identification for the event; the name of the relevant device; the text describing the event; the date and time of occurrence (PCs local time); 368 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 the duration. A shortcut menu attached to each event gives access to commands for finding the paired event (in certain conditions see Find paired events page 374 and quickly filtering the selected event (see Quickly filter an event type page 375). The command for finding a paired event is also available by double-clicking on an item in the table. 4.8.3 - Commands 4.8.3.1 - Commands for opening an event log file " " " " Opening an archived event log file The File/Open command in the menu bar or the quick-access button replaces the log displayed in the application by the one contained in an archived file. These commands display standard dialogue box for selecting an event log file whose extension must be .db. Figure 4.150: Opening an archived event log file " " " " Opening the current event log The File/Open current command in the menu bar replaces the event log displayed in the application by the current event log. Chapter 4 369 4.8 - {Event Log} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual If it fails to open a message informs the user accordingly and the file being viewed remains open. If file reading occurs normally the applications title bar is updated and the events in the current file appear in the main window. This command is disabled when the open file is the current file. " " " " Opening a file archived during the week The File/Open previous command in the menu bar gives quick access to an event log archived during the week. Backup files are attached to each day of the week: Monday: Evtlog01.db file Tuesday: Evtlog02.db file Wednesday: Evtlog03.db file Thursday: Evtlog04.db file Friday: Evtlog05.db file Saturday: Evtlog06.db file Sunday: Evtlog07.db file If it fails to open (the file is not in the current directory for instance) a message informs the user accordingly and the file being viewed remains open. 4.8.3.2 - Command for exporting in text format The File/Export... command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened successfully. It creates a text file containing the events displayed in the main window. File format: <#><UTC date><type><level><id><ext><desc><device_name> <text><duration> The symbols and replace the tabulation and 'carriage return' characters which do not appear on print-outs. Note: Filtering criteria apply on file opening. Certain events may therefore not be displayed. Important: To export the entire open event log all filtering must be cancelled beforehand. 370 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 <#> Record number of the event in the log file. <UTC date> UTC date and time of the event. The date format depends on the settings in the Windows control panel. <type> Event type: rising alarm, falling alarm, reboot, connection, disconnection, activation, service switch, service switch back, auto backup, si update. <level> minor, major, not applicable. <id> Event identifier. <ext> Event sub-identifier. The <id>, <ext> pair provides unique identification for an event. <desc> Number containing the parameters of the event. Its meaning depends on the event. It can contain a bitrate, a PID, a service_id, etc. <device_name> Name of the device as displayed in the application without its type. <text> Descriptive text displayed in the application in English or French depending on settings. <duration> Duration associated with the event. This field is blank when insignificant. See section Calculation of durations page 378. Example: Figure 4.151: Example of a text file after log exporting When this command is run, a dialogue box requests the Operator to enter the name of the target file. The default file name is that of the open file with the extension .txt. Only the .txt extension is accepted. Chapter 4 371 4.8 - {Event Log} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual If the name entered by the Operator is that of an existing file, confirmation is requested before overwriting. The directory selected by the Operator is stored and displayed as the default backup directory when the command is next run. The export file format is suitable for use with a spreadsheet such as Excel. Figure 4.152: Example of an exported file open in Excel 4.8.3.3 - Display commands " " " " Refresh the view When the open event log is the current event log, the View/Refresh command in the menu bar or the quick-access button updates the display following the receipt of new events. If the events added to the log satisfy the display criteria they are displayed in the main window. The selection remains unchanged after a refresh. These commands are disabled when the open file is not the current file or as long as no new events have been received. " " " " Selecting (filtering) displayed events The View/Select events command in the menu bar and the quick-access button are only available if the base opened successfully. These commands are used to customise event display in the main view by masking certain events. The filtering criteria available enable the Operator to display just certain event types; certain alarms; events between two dates; 372 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 events relating to certain devices. The selected filtering criteria are stored when the Operator quits the application and reapply when the View/Selected events command is run (see page 374). When the command is run the following dialogue box is displayed: Figure 4.153: Filtering criteria This box includes four sections: Display the events; From alarm display; From devices; For the period. Choice of event types to display Chapter 4 373 4.8 - {Event Log} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Only checkmarked events will be visible. By default, when the application is first used the All events option is selected. The types available depend on the events featured in the table, a list of events is displayed by default (see page 362). If the open file contains unknown event types, these also appear in this list as a character string comprising the word Event followed by the event identifier. It is possible to select or deselect all the items in the list using the Select all and Deselect all commands in the popup menu attached to the list. Alarm management When rising or falling alarms are selected filtering can be refined, by either masking certain alarms, or restricting the display to certain alarms. The + and buttons opposite each list can be used to add or remove an alarm. To add an alarm to a list select the + button or run the Add command in the popup menu attached to the list and enter the alarms identifier and sub-identifier. Figure 4.154: Add an alarm dialogue box The Alarm id field must be between 1 and 191. Devices Filtering can be set to display just events relating to certain devices. The list of devices is derived from the devices featured in the table. The device names are sorted in alphabetical order. It is possible to select or deselect all the items in the list using the Select all and Deselect all commands in the popup menu attached to the list. Filtering period Each event is signed by a date and a time given by the device clock. It is possible to introduce time as a filtering parameter to display only events collected between two specific dates. 374 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 There are two possible options: Entire log: This is the default option. The date and time are not included in the selection criteria. Only the events occurring between: The operator specifies the dates and times concerned by the selection. " " " " Display all events The View/All events command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened successfully. It is used to display all the events without changing the configuration of any filter defined with the View/Select events command. When this command is run, a checkmark appears next to the command title. To delete this checkmark run the View/Selected events command (see section 4.2.8). " " " " Display selected events The View/Selected events command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened successfully. It is used to apply the filter defined with the View/Select events... command to the event view. When this command is run, a checkmark appears next to the command title. To delete this checkmark run the View/All events command (see previous section). To facilitate event list scanning, a command in the shortcut menu attached to the main window is available to go to the event paired with the selected event (see page 362 for the list of events concerned by this command). The title of this command depends on the item type selected: for a rising (raising) alarm the associated command is Go to the clearing alarm. for a falling (clearing) alarm the associated command is Go to the raising alarm. for a service switch (to replacing) the associated command is Go to the service switch back. for a service switch back (to regular) the associated command is Go to the service switch. for a connection the associated command is Go to the disconnection. for a disconnection the associated command is Go to the connection. Let us consider the following example: " "" " Find paired events Chapter 4 375 4.8 - {Event Log} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Figure 4.155: Example of a search for a paired event (1 of 2) Select the raising 697 event and double-click or run the Go to the clearing alarm command. If the clearing event is present the cursor automatically goes to this item. Figure 4.156: Example of a search for a paired event (2 of 2) In certain cases (e.g. if a filter is applied to raising alarms only) the search can fail in which case an error message is displayed: Figure 4.157: Message indicating search failure The title of the error message varies according to the event type sought. This function is used to quickly mask a type of event without using the filtering configuration screen. Just select the relevant event in the main view and run the Mask this event command in the shortcut menu. Figure 4.158: Quickly filtering an event type " "" " Quickly filter an event type 376 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 " " " " Sort display order This command is used to sort events for display either by record number or by date and time. Sorting is activated by clicking directly on the column in the main view. One click sorts in ascending order, a second click in descending order. The selection remains unchanged after sorting. 4.8.3.4 - Calculation commands " " " " Statistics The Tools/Report command in the menu bar is only available if the base opened successfully. It produces a report from the open event log. When this command is run, a dialogue box is displayed to select the period for analysis. Figure 4.159: Edit events report This command displays a summary table per device for the chosen period: Notes: 1. All the events of the same type as the one selected disappear from the view. This concerns all devices and not just the selected device. 2. Masking can be disabled by changing the configuration parameters available with the View/Select events... command. Chapter 4 377 4.8 - {Event Log} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Figure 4.160: Example of an events report In the table the items are sorted in ascending alphabetical order by device name. The table format is as follows: <device> Device name <alarms> Number of alarms on the device <major> Number of major alarms on the device <minor> Number of minor alarms on the device <reboots> Number of device reboots <disconnections> Number of device disconnections <others> Total of other events related to the device <total> Total of all events related to the device 378 Chapter 4 4.8 - {Event Log} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The Tools/Calc durations... command in the menu bar is used to calculate the duration between a rising alarm and a falling alarm or the next device reboot. Given the time required for the calculation, this command is only available on backup files and the Operator has to confirm command execution. Once the calculation has been performed, the duration of each event is displayed in the Duration column in the main window. Durations are stored in the event log file. It is not necessary to recalculate duration each time a file is opened. " "" " Calculation of durations Note: When the calculation proves impossible (if the falling alarm is not saved in the same file) or duration is insignificant, the Duration column remains blank. Chapter 4 379 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 4.9 - {ALARM HELP} APPLICATION 4.9.1 - Scope This application get electronic on-line help about alarms generated by supervised devices. The online help application is run like any other DBS 2930 "Stand-Alone" application or automatically via the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {EventLog} applications. It can also be run from the command line. 4.9.2 - Features 4.9.2.1 - Extended description of alarms For each alarm or event, the {Alarm help} application provides the following extended information: Alarm AID (number), e.g.: 5; Alarm AID (text), e.g.: AID_ALIM; Alarm extension id (number, if passed through the command line); Alarm severity (major/minor) + icon (red for major, orange for minor); Wording of the alarm (as in the Alarms Window of the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application) (text in English or French); Category of the alarm. Matches X733 standard categories when possible (Equipment, QoS, etc.); Autobackup current capability (Selectable / Impossible) indicates if this device is allowed to trigger automatic redundancy switch-over for itself; Autobackup upstream capability (Selectable / Impossible) indicates if this device is allowed to trigger automatic redundancy switch-over for the upstream device; Probable cause (text in English or French); X733 standard probable cause (only displayed when applicable); Action to take (text in English or French); Source device(s) (text); User comments (text). 380 Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.9.2.2 - Print capability A print command is used to print either the displayed alarm, all alarms or all the alarms regarding one device type. All fields are systematically printed except user comments. The user can choose whether to print them or not. Printing (and display) is carried out according to the current language selected. 4.9.2.3 - Search engine By entering an AID (and possibly AlarmIdExtension and/or AlarmIdDescription), the {Alarm help} application jumps to the alarm page identified by this AID. If several alarms have the same AID, the first of the list is displayed. It also searches for a word in general and displays all the alarms containing this word. The search result is displayed in the Summary window. Then, when selecting the alarm, the usual online help is displayed. 4.9.2.4 - Navigation tool The {Alarm help} application is used to go to the previous, next, first or last alarm in the entire list of potential alarms (not the active alarm lists displayed in the master application). Alarms are sorted by AID and then by cause. 4.9.2.5 - Synchronisation with the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {Event Log} applications From the {Monitoring & Redundancy} and {Event Log} applications, there is a command that automatically runs the {Alarm help} application and displays the selected alarm. When the {Alarm help} application has already been run, no new instance of this application is run, its display is just updated. 4.9.2.6 - Synchronisation with other applications Other applications can use the {Alarm help} application by selecting the command line with the alarm parameters: AlarmId, AlarmIdExtension, AlarmIdDescription. See Access via any application page 383. 4.9.2.7 - User defined comments The {Alarm help} application enables the user to add comments for one alarm. These comments are saved on the disk and are still kept after a soft patch. If an Chapter 4 381 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual alarm has been deleted in a new patch, the corresponding user comment entry is also deleted. A comment can be 4096 characters long and is completely modifiable (Cut/Copy/Paste) by an edit command. It can only store alphanumeric characters. They are independent of language settings. 4.9.2.8 - French/English versions The graphical user interface is available in either English or in French. It depends on language settings when the {Alarm Help} application is installed. 4.9.2.9 - Customisation of display The following fields are optional and may be shown or hidden in the {Alarm help} application window: Wording; Autobackup current and Autobackup upstream; Action to take; User comment; Source device(s); Cause; X733 standard probable cause; Category. 4.9.2.10 - Summary of alarms The summary displays all available alarms sorted by AID. AID name and alarm wording are also displayed to recover an alarm. While selecting an alarm in this list, the {Alarm help} application is automatically updated. See User Interface (main window and commands) page 384 4.9.2.11 - Help / About A help/about command displays the {Alarm help} application version and a number identifying the table content. 382 Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.9.3 - Access to the {Alarm help} application 4.9.3.1 - Access via the {Monitoring &Redundancy} application The {Alarm help} application is accessible: via the menu toolbar help command: This only runs the {Alarm help} application (no alarm is selected). Figure 4.161: Access from {Monitoring &Redundancy} by selecting an alarm in the Alarms window in the {Monitoring & Redundancy} application and pressing the <F1> key. by right-clicking on a shortcut menu attached to an alarm and selecting Display help. Figure 4.162: Contextual Display help... command attached to an alarm 4.9.3.2 - Access via the {Event Log} application The {Alarm help} application is accessible: via the menu toolbar help command; by selecting an alarm in the Alarms window and pressing the <F1> key; by right-clicking on a shortcut menu attached to an alarm or an event and selecting Display help. Chapter 4 383 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 4.9.3.3 - Access via any application {Alarm help} is an independent application (.exe) and can be accessed from the command line. Parameters are optional. Here are the use cases: AlarmHelp {Alarm help} has been run and displays the first alarm. AlarmHelp <AlarmId> displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId. AlarmHelp <AlarmId> <AlarmIdExtension> displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId and AlarmIdExtension. AlarmHelp <AlarmId> <AlarmIdExtension> <AlarmIdDescription> displays the first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId, AlarmIdExtension and AlarmIdDescription. with <AlarmId>: integer, <AlarmIdExtension>: integer, <AlarmIdDescription>: integer. Figure 4.163: Access via a command line (here, first alarm corresponding to the AlarmId = 1) If no alarm is found or if the previous format is not respected, an error message box is displayed: Alarm not found. {Alarm Help} will display the nearest one. 384 Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.9.4 - User Interface (main window and commands) A resizable pop-up window displays the previously selected alarm: Figure 4.164: Alarm Help main window In the menu bar, the database and DBS 2930 "Stand-Alone" versions are available via the Help/About database... and Help/About Alarm Help... commands in the menu bar. All other commands can be found at the top of the window. Each button corresponds to one command (Summary, First, Previous, Next, Last, Search, Print, Configure). Summary Summary button displays the list of available alarms. Chapter 4 385 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual First {Alarm help} application displays the first alarm of the alarm list. Previous {Alarm help} application displays the previous alarm of the current alarm list. Next {Alarm help} application displays the next alarm of the current alarm list. Last {Alarm help} application displays the last alarm of the current alarm list. Search... The Search button displays a dialogue box and the user has to enter the AID or the AID and ALARM IdExtension and/or AlarmIdDescription of the alarm he or she wants to find. If the alarm is not found, an error message box is displayed and the {Alarm help} application still displays the previous alarm. It also searches for a word among the entire list of alarms and displays the search result in the summary window. The user has to select the alarm containing the word and the main window is updated. When the summary is closed, the main window displays the searched alarm. Figure 4.165: Search dialogue box Print Click on the Print button to display a dialogue box and select the type of print job and whether the user comments are to be printed or not (check box). A 386 Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 preview button displays the print preview (with QuickReport 3.0.5). Figure 4.166: Print dialogue box Here are the types of available print options: (Print) Displayed alarm. Here is an example of a print job for the current alarm: Figure 4.167: Example of a print job Chapter 4 387 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual (Print) Alarm regarding one device type Select All Alarms of one device in the dialogue box and then select the type of device. Here is an extract from a print job for all alarms regarding one device type (switcher): (Print) All alarms Select All Alarms in the dialogue box. The format is the same as for the displayed alarm. Configure The Configure button opens a list of fields that may be displayed or not. By default, all fields are displayed. 388 Chapter 4 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 4.168: Configure dialogue box If the User comments box is selected, user comments are displayed in the main window of the {Alarm Help} application and can be edited via another dialogue box accessible by clicking on the User Comment hyperlink: Figure 4.169: Comments editor Chapter 4 389 4.9 - {Alarm Help} application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Comments are edited by directly typing the text in the dialogue box panel. They are saved once the user selects OK. If Cancel is selected, all modifications are deleted and the user comments panel reverts to its previous state. Delete, Copy and Paste respectively delete the selected text, copy it to clipboard and paste it from the clipboard. 390 Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.10 - COMMANDS AVAILABLE WITH THE TELNET APPLICATION This section describes how to use the Telnet application. It also explains the role of parameters available to the user. The following parameters can be edited by the user: Audio stream type, LTW offset, Superencoder source switching mode, VBI stream type, IP Communication. LDSChurch mode, ABSAT mode, Multichoice-D1 mode, Foxtel 6dB uplift, Closed caption type, Extended-data insertion (line 284). 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application This section describes how to access the Telnet application and edit the parameters. The definition of editable parameters is given in the following section. Note: editing parameters other than those described can lead to major device malfunction. Chapter 4 391 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 1) On the PC connected to the device, run the Telnet command to open the applica- tion. 2) Select Remote System under the Connect command in the Telnet (None) window 3) In the Connect window, enter the device IP address and click on the Connect button to validate 392 Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Once the connection has been established with the device, the following window is displayed: 4) Do not enter a User name and press Enter on the keyboard. The following window is displayed: 5) Enter setup after the {Runtime@SSEB}/r0: prompt 6) Do not enter a Password and press Enter on the keyboard Chapter 4 393 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 7) Enter edit after the SETUP prompt 8) The window displays several choices, select 8 operating mode 394 Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The first editable parameter is displayed. The example above shows the Video bidir parameter which can be set to ON if the value 1 is entered or OFF if the value 0 is entered. The value in brackets indicates the current parameter value. If you press Enter on the keyboard without indicating a value, the current value is kept and the next parameter displayed. The next param- eter is also displayed if you enter a new value. All the parameters are displayed and edited in the same way: Chapter 4 395 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 9) When all the parameters have been displayed, the window again displays several choices. Select 0 Exit to display the SETUP prompt: 10) Enter quit after the SETUP prompt The Save setup ? question is displayed. Enter y. The Are you sure ? question is displayed. Enter y. 396 Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The Setup has been saved message is displayed to confirm that changes have been saved. 4.10.2 - IP Settings The IP Address, IP Netmask and Default gateway parameters can be edited via the Telnet application. To do this: 1) follow the instructions in section 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application up until window 8). Select 2 : ethernet IP address Note: the changes will be applied when the device is next booted up. Chapter 4 397 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 2) the IP parameters window is displayed: 3) enter the parameter values as indicated in steps 8), 9) and 10) of the section 4.10.1 - Using the Telnet application. 4.10.3 - Parameter definitions The parameter editing procedure is described in the previous section. 4.10.3.1 - Video bidir Video bidir (ON:1 OFF:0) (x)? This parameter applies to very specific applications and should not be edited. Default value = 0. 4.10.3.2 - Audio stream type Audio stream type (MPEG1:3 MPEG2:4) (x)? This parameter defines the Audio stream type value so that it corresponds to either MPEG1 (value3) or MPEG2 (value 4). Default value = 3. All Audio components generated by the encoder will have the same audio stream type and no combination is possible. Note: the changes will be applied when the device is next booted up. 398 Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4.10.3.3 - LTW_offset Set LTW_offset flag when service PCR (Yes:1 No:2) (x)? This parameter tells the encoder whether or not it should add the LTW offset value to the video when the video is carrying the PCR. Default value = 1. 4.10.3.4 - SPE (SuperEncoder) switch source mode SPE switch source mode (same as old board:1 same as new board:2) (x)? This parameter is used to choose the SuperEncoder board switch mode: if you have an old version of the board (version AG), mode 1 must be selected if you have a recent version of the board (versions AH, AJ or AK), mode 2 must be selected. However, if the video input signals are not synchronous then interference caused by the switch appears on the picture. In this case mode 1 can be used to reduce interference. 4.10.3.5 - VBI stream type VBI stream_type with MT lines (ISO:1 BARCO:2) (x)? This parameter is used to choose the stream type value used for Monochrome trans- parent VBI components. The (ISO) default value is the 0x06 standardised value. The other possible (BARCO) value is 0x92 which corresponds to a BARCO propri- etary value used for Monochrome transparent lines. All Monochrome transparent lines generated by the encoder have either a 0x06 or 0x92 stream type value and no combination is possible. A descriptor must be added to the PMT. See {Technical Configuration} application section Editing parameters of the VBI component page 264. 4.10.3.6 - LDSChurch mode LDSChurch mode -ignored when SPE board is declared- (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? This mode only concerns operation in 60Hz mode. When the mode is set to ON, the active lines in fields 1 and 2 are moved up a line. The first active line is therefore line 21 for field 1 and line 284 for field 2 (the first line being line 1). This mode is used to transmit the sub-titles as a useful part of the video signal. Chapter 4 399 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual On a DBE 4130 or 4150 Encoder featuring a SuperEncoder board, this parameter is not acknowledged and the lines are not moved up. The SuperEncoder board is detected when the device is turned on. Checking the "closed caption" box in the DBS 2930 Operating station, video component parameters VBI tab is unnecessary. If the box is checked, the sub-titles will be transmitted in the video stream twice (as user data and in line 21). Default value = 2 4.10.3.7 - ABSAT mode ABSat mode (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? This mode, designed for the DBE 4130 Encoder, is used to modify Video encoding so that it is compatible with Philips "G+2" series decoders. When ABsat mode has been selected: - the VBV delay value is calculated and sent for each picture, - the default quantisation matrix is systematically included for each I-picture. The DBE 4130 Encoder in ABSat mode remains DVB compliant. Notes: - operation in ABSat mode is not guaranteed with decoders other than Philips "G+2" series decoders. - ABsat mode has been designed for the DBE 4130 Encoder. Operation in ABsat mode is not guaranteed for other DBE 41XX Encoders. - ABsat mode only operates in 50Hz mode. - the Helper Channel application, which is a specific function of the DBE 4120 Encoder, does not operate in ABsat mode. Default value = 2 4.10.3.8 - Multichoice-D1 mode Multichoice-D1 mode (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? This mode implements an MPEG-2 syntax specifically for the video component. - Each PES contains a single GOP, - The PES is formatted as follows: 400 Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 - the DataAlignmentIndicator bit is set to 1 (PES payload begins on a video "Elementary Stream" header), - the PES data length field uses 10 bytes instead of 11 for I and P-pictures (a 0xFF stuffing byte has been deleted). - There is no stuffing byte between pictures at "Elementary Stream" level (no 16-bit alignment), - There is no stuffing "Elementary Stream" (minimum payload at TS level). When the mode is set to OFF, each PES contains a picture, the DataAlignmentIndi- cator is set to 0, the PES data length field uses 11 bytes, there is a number of stuffing "Elementary Streams" (required to align the start of the PES with the start of the TS packet) and there is no longer 16-bit alignment. Default value = 2. 4.10.3.9 - Foxtel 6dB uplift Foxtel 6dB uplift (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? This mode adds +6dB of gain to audio samples encoded in MPEG-1 by the SSEB board. The audio is doubled before peak limiting and encoding. All SSEB board audio inputs are concerned: - SDI, - Analogue audio converted to digital. All audio components encoded by the SSEB board are affected. AES/EBU audio signals generated by the ATADI board are affected. The 2.1kHz test signal, 0dB generated by the SSEB board is not affected. Audio signals generated by the AMUSE board are not affected. The uncompressed audio mode (DBE 4120) is not affected. Note: you are advised not to use Foxtel mode and a 384Kbit/s bitrate at the same time, as in this case audio quality is not guaranteed. Default value = 2 Chapter 4 401 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual 4.10.3.10 - Closed Caption type Closed Caption type -only with DBE4130- (DVB/ATSC:1 DVB/DSS:2) (x) ? In 60Hz mode, the DBE 41XX can extract line 21 sub-title information (the first line being line 1) from the video input signal (if the information is modulated and not binary) and can insert it into the "Video Elementary stream" according to the ATSC A/53 standard. This is done when the "Closed caption" box is checked in the Technical Configuration application, video component advanced parameters, VBI tab. With a DBE 4130 Encoder, the sub-titles can be inserted into the "Video Elementary stream" according to two standards: DVB/ATSC: 1 = "DVB / ATSC A/53" standard, DVB/DSS: 2 = "DTV95MDB-04, DirectTV MPEG1 and MPEG2 video stream specifications for IRDs, version 2.1" standard. This parameter does not affect the MPEG-2 TS layer or the PSI and SI tables. This function is only implemented on DBE 4130 Encoders. On other DBE 41XX Encoders, the parameter value is set to 1. Default value = 1 (DVB/ATSC A/53) 4.10.3.11 - Extended-data insertion (line 284) Extended-data insertion (line 284) -only with DBE4130- (ON:1 OFF:2) (x) ? Line 21 of the second field (i.e. line 284) can contain information similar to sub-title information known as "extended data services". This parameter can have two values: 2 = OFF 1 = ON, the "extended data services" data is extracted from the video input signal (only in modulated form) and inserted into the "Video Elementary stream" syntax in the same way as the sub-titles. This function is only implemented on DBE 4130 Encoders operating in 60Hz mode. On other DBE 41XX Encoders, the parameter value is set to 2 (OFF). Default value = 2 Notes concerning Closed Caption type and Extended-data insertion (line 284) parameters: 402 Chapter 4 4.10 - Commands available with the Telnet application THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 - A minor alarm will be raised if the Extended-data insertion (line 284) parameter is set to 1 and no data is present in the input signal. - The video component syntax defines "a data type identifier" which has the value 0x09 for sub-titles and 0x0A for "extended data services" data. - If the DBE 4130 Encoder must be switched to 50Hz mode, the Extended-data insertion (line 284) parameter must be set to 2 (OFF) before the Encoder is switched from 60Hz to 50Hz mode. The follow table gives permitted combinations for the Closed Caption and Extended Data parameters: Except for the restrictions given in the table above, any combination of the five ABSat, LDS, Multichoice, Closed Caption, Extended Data parameters is permitted. Operating station Encoder configuration Result Closed Caption ON/OFF Closed Caption ATSC/DSS Extended Data ON/OFF 0 0 0 No Closed Caption and no Extended Data 0 0 1 Do not use 0 1 0 No Closed Caption and no Extended Data 0 1 1 DSS Extended Data 0 0 0 ATSC Closed Caption 1 0 1 Do not use 1 1 0 DSS Closed Caption 1 1 1 DSS Closed Caption and DSS Extended Data 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 - PC operation - Fast_DSNG software 403
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 405 5.1 - Fast-DSNG 5.1 - FAST-DSNG A DSNG system is used to transmit pictures and sound between the site of an event and a professional television (producer, television channel, etc.). The signals are produced at the site of the event from a mobile system containing the equipment required to produce video and audio signals and transmit them to a site for broadcast via a satellite link. The size of the DSNG system can vary considerably, depending on the coverage desired for the event and the mobility required. A DSNG system can just as easily be a camera, encoder, satellite modulator/up-converter which can fit into one or two flight cases, as several O.B. vans containing cameras, mixing desks, encoders, cables, etc. " " " " Those involved in DSNG systems are: - satellite operators; - satellite antenna manufacturers; - satellite modem manufacturers; - manufacturers of power amplifiers and RF systems; - video encoder/decoder manufacturers; - audio encoder/decoder manufacturers; - supervision system manufacturers; - systems integrators. " " " " Setting up DSNG communications Setting up a satellite link requires that a procedure defined by the satellite operator be followed: 1. The satellite operator notifies the DSNG operator of the: - position of the satellite; - transmission power; - uplink frequency; - bandwidth; - downlink frequency after frequency translation by the satellite. 2. The DSNG operator contacts the reception station by telephone and begins a connection procedure. 3. This operator directs the satellite antenna and transmits a low power, pure carrier on the uplink frequency. When communication occurs on frequency C-band, spec- tral inversion may be required. 406 Chapter 5 5.1 - Fast-DSNG THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 4. The reception station confirms reception of the signal. 5. From this moment onwards, the DSNG operator can no longer interrupt the signal transmitted to the satellite because signal absence may be interpreted by automatic frequency allocation systems as availability of the frequency and band- width. 6. The DSNG operator increases the power and sets the modulator to modulation mode. 7. If the operator has a decoder and his geographical position enables him to receive the transmitted signal, he checks that the transmission is being sent correctly. In the event of a problem, he may also check the signal at the modulator output by using the L-BAND output. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 407 5.2 - Software presentation 5.2 - SOFTWARE PRESENTATION " " " " Purpose This software is supplied as standard with DBE 4110 encoders. The main purpose of this software is to facilitate input of the parameters required for setting up a satellite link on the encoders and the modulator. Configuration using the graphic interface is very simple. The operator can display all the transmission parameters together with the composition of the transmitted signal on six screens. Configuration changes are optimised by reducing operator actions. The software operates on a PC (laptop) with standard performance, featuring: - Windows 95, 98 or NT operating system; - Ethernet 10BaseT interface; - 640x800 colour screen with 256 colours; - pointer device (mouse or other). The application is only available in English. 408 Chapter 5 5.2 - Software presentation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 " " " " Environment Three configurations are supported in the software. Configuration 1: one encoder only Configuration 2: one encoder and one modulator. The modulator is controlled by the encoder (called the main encoder) which must feature the N41SMODC option (NEWTEC modulator control) or the ISMB board. Configuration 3: two encoders and one modulator. The modulator is controlled by one of the encoders (called the main encoder) which must feature the N41SMODC option (NEWTEC modulator control) or the ISMB board. The output of the second encoder is connected to the ASI input of the main encoder. The main encoder must feature the N41STSIN option (ASI TS input processing). Pilot encoder Modulator upconverter HPA (poser amplifier) satellite dish ASI FI RF Decoder LBand Second encoder ASI 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 409 5.2 - Software presentation The other devices that can be used in a DSNG system (redundant encoders, deco- ders, power amplifiers, up-converter) are not controlled by this software, apart from the up-converter when it is incorporated into the modulator. 410 Chapter 5 5.3 - Interfaces THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 5.3 - INTERFACES 5.3.1 - Encoder interface The encoders are controlled/monitored by an Ethernet 10BaseT interface in TCP/IP using the NEXTREAM protocol. Configuration 3 (with two encoders) requires a hub to allow the two encoders to be controlled from the same PC. 5.3.2 - Modulator/up-converter interface The modulator/up-converter is controlled/monitored via the main encoder which must feature the N41SMODC option (Ext. Modulator C&C) or the ISMB board. 5.3.3 - Graphic interface The graphic interface is a standard Windows interface. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 411 5.4 - Functions 5.4 - FUNCTIONS Fast_DSNG software is used to display and modify part of the configuration of the modulator and encoders. 5.4.1 - Modulator configuration The parameters which can be modified are: - output mode (off, pure carrier, on); - attenuation of the output signal; - symbol rate or bandwidth; - RF frequency; - convolution and FEC; - activation of spectral inversion. 5.4.2 - Encoder configuration The main parameters that can be modified are: - list of components inserted into the signal; - enabling/disabling of scrambling for all the components; - session word used for scrambling and parity; - bit rate of each component (the bit rate can be calculated automatically for video components). The DVB signalling information associated with the service and network is automa- tically set by the software. 5.4.3 - Supervision The available supervision functions are: - display of the active alarms list of the encoders; - level of each alarm; 412 Chapter 5 5.4 - Functions THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 - display of the serial numbers of the encoders; - display of the software and hardware options installed on each encoder. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 413 5.5 - Operation 5.5 - OPERATION 5.5.1 - General principles The graphic interface of the DSNG application is a 6-panel dialogue box: - Transmission; - Alarms; - Scrambling; - Information; - Preset; - Setup. You move from one panel to another by clicking the tabs of the relevant panels or pressing the function keys F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 or F8 for panels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. All parameters can be edited with the mouse. Just click on the small calculator image to the right of each parameter editing field: Figure 5.1: Numeric keypad 414 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 5.5.2 - Setup panel This panel is mainly used on initial application start-up. It allows the software to be configured to indicate: - whether Control/Command communication of the equipment is enabled or disa- bled; - the system configuration (1, 2 or 3); - the parameters required for setting up the Control/Command links of the encoders, i.e. their IP address. The parameters are saved to the hard disk and are read automatically each time the software is started up. They are saved in a file of the Windows initialisation file (.ini) type. Figure 5.2: Setup panel The choice of configuration and IP addresses of the encoders is only possible when communication with the devices is stopped. To do this, press the button in the bottom left hand of the window. Follow the instructions in the box on the right-hand side of the panel: Enter the IP address of the first encoder, 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 415 5.5 - Operation Select other devices, modulator or a second encoder: - Check Controls a modulator box (if a modulator is present), - Check Uses an external signal in TS input box, to enable the TS input (the option is present in the first encoder) to be connected to an external device not controlled by the {Fast_DSNG} application, - Check Use and Control a second encoder box, to allow the control of a second encoder. The TS input option must be present in the second encoder (check Use an external signal in TS input box), enter its IP address, - Enter the name of the service in the Station name put in window, 6 characters plus -1 (or -2). Caution! The encoder(s) and the PC must have different IP addresses. If two devices have the same IP address, software behaviour may be unpredictable. When the information has been entered, press Connect to DSNG system to start up Control/Command communication with devices. When communication is enabled, the software attempts to set up communication with the encoder(s) in order to gather the configuration information displayed to the user in the other panels. 416 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 5.5.3 - Transmission panel The Transmission panel is the most frequently used panel. It is displayed by default on starting up the application if the parameters required for starting communications were found in the initialisation file. Figure 5.3: Transmission panel It is divided vertically into two areas: - transmission parameters are displayed on the left; - parameters linked to encoder control and signal content are displayed on the right. Note: If a modulator is used, the Transmission page can be used to change the L-Band Frequency parameter. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 417 5.5 - Operation 5.5.3.1 - Transmission parameters Transmission parameters are found in two areas. The upper area is used during the procedure for setting up satellite communication. The lower area is used for confi- guring the modulator. In the upper part, four buttons control the modulator output: In Off position (key F9), the modulator does not transmit a signal. The operator can then set the modulation parameters (frequency, bandwidth, etc.) in the lower area. The application does not send any configuration to encoder. In Ready position (key F10), the modulator does not transmit, the parameters can no longer be edited. The software sends the configuration to the encoders. In any Pure carrier position (key F11), the modulator transmits a pure carrier with the level displayed under the button. The parameters entered in the lower area can no longer be edited. In Modulation position (key F12), the modulator transmits a modulated signal with the level set to High. In this mode, level and modulation parameters can no longer be edited. Note: If the system is disconnected, all the devices remain in the initial state. The parameters displayed in the lower area can only be modified in the Off position (key F9). Access is unauthorised in the other positions and the cursor indicates this by changing its form ( ). The Symbol rate and Bandwidth parameters are interlinked by a formula that involves the Convolution parameter. Each time the operator changes one of these three, the Bandwidth and/or Symbol rate parameters are recalculated immediately. Thus, if the operator enters the symbol rate, the application will immediately calcu- late the bandwidth for information purposes, or vice versa. The calculated value will be displayed in the process. Note: If a bad format is chosen, the bandwidth cannot be calculated and the field remains blank. An error message is displayed. 418 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 The following formula is applied: Bandwidth = Symbol rate * (1 + Roll off) where Roll off = 0.35 in QPSK convolution Roll off = 0.26 in 8PSK or 16 QAM convolution 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 419 5.5 - Operation 5.5.3.2 - Parameters linked to encoder control and signal content In Figure 5.3, the right-hand area of the dialogue box is dedicated to encoder control and the content of the transmitted signal. The button in the Components area title is used to quickly modify the service-id parameter. Figure 5.4: Service Id Editor It displays two lists of available components (one list per encoder). The content of the list depends on the software and hardware options installed on each encoder. Above each list, an alarm symbol appears in front of each encoder name. Its appea- rance depends on alarm status: Green: no alarm, Orange or red flashing: alarms have occurred. In the list, a check box in front of each item allows a component to be inserted into the signal transmitted to the satellite. By clicking these boxes, the components are inserted into, or removed from, the signal one by one. If the Video bitrate automatic adjustment in the Transmission panel is checked, each time a component is inserted into or removed from the signal, the application recalculates the bit rate of the video components automatically to ensure optimum use of the bandwidth. For systems with two encoders, the rate allocated to each video component is always identical. For advanced use, a button located under each list allows access to parameters of the component selected in the list. This screen can be used to modify the PID, profile or other advanced parameters. The presentation of the parameters in these screens is identical to that of the DBS 2930. To change video parameters, the procedure is: 1. Select the component, 420 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 2. Click on the Edit Video parameters... button or double-click on the component, 3. The screen for the parameters of a video component (General panel) appears: Figure 5.5: Video parameters (general panel) The video rate cannot be set by the user if it is calculated automatically for each change of transmitted components. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 421 5.5 - Operation 4. Click on the Advanced tab to edit the advanced parameters of a video component (Advanced panel): Figure 5.6: Video parameters (advanced panel) 422 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 5. Click on the VBI tab to edit the VBI parameters of a video component (VBI panel): Figure 5.7: Video parameters (VBI panel) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 423 5.5 - Operation 6. Click on the Helper Channel tab for the encoder to use any helper channel infor- mation present or transmit the encoding decisions: Figure 5.8: Video parameters (Helper Channel panel) To change audio parameters, the procedure is: 1. Select the component, 2. Click on the Edit Audio parameters... button or double-click on the component, 3. The screen for the parameters of an audio component (General panel) appears: 424 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 5.9: Audio parameters (general panel) 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 425 5.5 - Operation 4. Click on the Advanced tab to edit the advanced parameters of an audio component (Advanced panel): Figure 5.10: Audio parameters (advanced panel) 426 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 5.5.4 - Alarms panel This window lists the current alarms on the devices. The list is refreshed approxi- mately every 5 seconds. The number of alarms features in the tab to the right of the page name. This saves the operator opening the Alarms page to find out the status of the device. When an alarm rises on a device, the application flashes in the Windows task bar to warn the operator who does not work on the application. Figure 5.11: Alarms panel The Acknowledge button is used to acknowledge all the alarms in the list. Acknowledge box is not checked: the LED is flashing in the Alarm panel or in the tasks bar, Acknowledge box is checked: the LED stops flashing. At each modification in the Alarm list, the button is released. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 427 5.5 - Operation 5.5.5 - Scrambling panel To use this panel, the appropriate scrambling option is required. Figure 5.12: Scrambling panel The operator can define a list of session words (SW) on the right of the panel and associate each SW with a client name. This list is saved to the hard disk of the PC and recovered each time the application is started up. Session words are limited to six bytes and parity is fixed (even). Three buttons located under the list are used to add, remove or edit a session word. To edit the session word or the service client name, select the corresponding Client Name and Session Word line in the right-hand area and click on Edit or double- click on the line. To add the session word or the service client name, select the corresponding Client Name and Session Word line in the right-hand area then click on Add. 428 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 Figure 5.13: Session Word and Client Name The left-hand area is used to enable or disable scrambling on each encoder and select the session word. The session word is selected from the list using Pick selected SW from list. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 429 5.5 - Operation 5.5.6 - Information panel This panel displays the read-only information on the software and hardware options of the encoders. Figure 5.14: Information panel 430 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 5.5.7 - Preset panel Figure 5.15: Preset panel This panel is used to configure each encoder with the configurations saved in the encoder memory, save configurations and delete backup configurations. Two types of memory are defined for DBE 4110 encoders: the authorised read and write memories that can be programmed by the Operator using the Fast_DSNG software. the authorised read-only memories that are programmed at the manufacturers. They contain the standard predefined configurations. The contents of these memories cannot be changed by the Operator. A list is displayed for each encoder in which each line represents a memory identified by a number or letter (1 to 8 for read and write memories; and A, B, and C for read-only memories). Each line also contains the name of the archived configuration and the memory status (Empty, Read only or Used). No name is shown in the second column when a memory is empty. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 5 431 5.5 - Operation Three buttons are also available to: copy the current encoder configuration onto the selected memory (Save button); activate the configuration from the selected memory (Recall button); delete the content of the selected memory (Clear button). Note: the value of the parameters recognised by the factory set configurations A, B and C are identical to those described in section 4.5.3.6 - Archived configurations. 432 Chapter 5 5.5 - Operation THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 5.5.8 - Dynamic behaviour This section contains the software specification elements that are liable to change. 5.5.8.1 - No connection On starting up the application, the software attempts to set up a control/command link with the main encoder then with the second encoder. As long as all connections (one or two depending on the configuration) are not set up, the configuration parameters are not displayed. As long as communications are not set up, the encoder parameters in the Transmis- sion, Alarms, Scrambling and Information panels are masked. 5.5.8.2 - Setting up a connection As soon as all the connections are set up, the software displays the current configu- ration. If the encoder does not know how manage the current configuration, it sends a message and proposes another standard configuration. For a configuration with two encoders, the following tests are carried out: - If the Main encoder does not feature the N41STSIN option, communications are broken and a message is displayed; - If the Main encoder features the N41STSIN option, the TS input configuration is forced to allow all the services through. When an external signal is used on the TS input, all the services pass through. Once the tests have been carried out, the encoder configuration is displayed on the software screens. Subsequently, the alarms are regularly requested from the device and displayed in the Alarms panel. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 6 - Troubleshooting 433
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6.1 - Device connection problems ............................................................ 436 6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse .................................................... 437 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems.................................................................... 438 6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy....................................................................... 438 6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank.................................................................. 438 6.3.3 - Default analogue video input ........................................................ 438 6.3.4 - Autotest problem........................................................................... 438 6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder............... 439 434 Chapter 6
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 6 435
This chapter contains useful information concerning first level maintenance. It is intended to help solve problems related to connection and mains fuse inspection. 436 Chapter 6 6.1 - Device connection problems THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 6.1 - DEVICE CONNECTION PROBLEMS Connection problems are often difficult to solve as causes are numerous and varied. A malfunction may be caused by the network being incorrectly set-up on the PC, a wiring problem or damage to a non-responding device. The aim of this section is to provide a procedure that can be followed to solve these problems in a minimum of time. When the DBE 4110 is signalled as not responding, proceed as follows: 1. Check that the DBE 4110 is operational and that the front panel is working, by moving around the menus. 2. Check that the IP address assigned to the device on the PC in the {Equipment Installation} application matches the one assigned to the device displayed on the front panel in the Other/Tools/IP Address menu. 3. Check that the DBE 4110 responds to network prompts; use the Ping IP address command in an MS-DOS window. If the device responds, skip the next paragraph. 4. Check the value of the subnet mask in the network set-up panel on the PC; the subnet mask identifies the part identifying the subnet in the IP address; like an IP address it consists of 4 numbers separated by "."; if the device address is not in the subnet, the device will not be accessible. 5. Check the cables with the ohmmeter; Ethernet cables are quite fragile and connector crimping may be faulty. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 6 437 6.2 - Inspecting the power supply fuse 6.2 - INSPECTING THE POWER SUPPLY FUSE If the "POWER" LED on the front panel is off, check the following in the order specified: 1. Check that the ON/OFF switch is ON. 2. Check the mains power supply source. 3. Reset the mains switch to OFF and disconnect the power cord. 4. Open the fuse holder on the switch base. 5. Measure the fuse value with an ohmmeter. - If a fuse is faulty, contact the NEXTREAM Customer Service. A faulty fuse indicates that the product is damaged. You are therefore not advised to simply change the fuse. Please have the product inspected by a qualified member of NEXTREAM maintenance staff. - If the fuse is not faulty, another fuse in the power supply drawer may be faulty. To inspect this fuse, the unit requires dismounting and hence comes under a higher maintenance level. The procedure is not described in this manual. Fuse holder 438 Chapter 6 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 6.3 - MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS 6.3.1 - Fan life expectancy The DBE 4110 has built in fans with a life expectancy of roughly 7 years at 30C (6 years at 40C). When your DBE 4110 reaches this age, fans will need to be replaced; please, contact NEXTREAM After Sales Service. 6.3.2 - Front panel LCD blank If the DBE 4110 is on and the front panel LCD is backlighted but does not show any indication or shows only four rows of black blocks, check that the contrast is properly set. 6.3.3 - Default analogue video input In the case of a device fitted with a DPSN board, the choice analogue video input PAL/SECAM (50Hz) or NTSC (60 Hz) should be available. If not, check that the DPSN board has been declared present ("Other/Tools/Option/Hardware"). 6.3.4 - Autotest problem When a device cannot exit the autotest, try to clear the memory. To do this, switch off and set the rotary switch (on the RSMAINT board, if present, if not, on the SSEB board) to position 5. Switch on, wait 1 minute, switch off, return the rotary switch to position 0, and switch on. However, all the configurations (the current one and those saved) will be lost. 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 6 439 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems 6.3.5 - Recommendations when using the MSU 4440 decoder Picture freeze: A PCR component must be generated. If "PSI OFF" decoder mode is used, check that the PCR PID is correct (generally the video component PID). The recommended value of the V_PTS offset is 400 (menu "CHANNEL #1/IRD CONFIG/V_PTS=400"). This value is mandatory as specified in the decoder user manual. Picture chroma incorrect, colours not stable: The 27 MHz clock generated by the decoder is jittering: its internal PLL is not locked. Check that the PCR PID is correct (PID of another service present in the input multiplex) or verify that the PCR is present. 440 Chapter 6 6.3 - Miscellaneous problems THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 7 - Customer Service 441
Chapter 7 Customer Service 7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity............................................................ 443 7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity ......................................................... 444 7.3 - Return your comments...................................................................... 445 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services........................................................ 446 442 Chapter 7
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 7 443 7.1 - EU Declaration of conformity 7.1 - EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 444 Chapter 7 7.2 - FCC Declaration of conformity THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 7.2 - FCC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 7 445 7.3 - Return your comments 7.3 - RETURN YOUR COMMENTS All comments help us to improve our publications. Do not hesitate to contact us: NEXTREAM France Dpartement Marketing Service Documentation Rue du Clos-Courtel 35 517 CESSON-SEVIGNE - FRANCE or by e-mail: philippe.thoumy@thomson.net Please give the manual reference. Reader name: Company: Address: Phone: Fax: E-mail: 446 Chapter 7 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 7.4 - NEXTREAM CUSTOMER SERVICES " " " " For all inquiries regarding the procedure for returning equipment for in-factory repairs and follow-up of repairs: contact the Customer Logistics Service by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82 by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92 by e-mail: cslogistics.nextream@thomson.net For all returns, please request an RMA (Return Material Authorisation) number from the Customer Logistics Service. The shipment address (B or C) will be confirmed and will depend on the product. Equipment should be returned in its original box with its return authorisation form (see following page). If you no longer have the packaging, the faulty device must be protected against shocks during transportation. The Customer Logistics Service examines packaging on arrival and can refuse to carry out repairs if the packaging has been visibly damaged during transportation and this has led to further damage in addition to the fault originally noted. Unless specifically agreed, cost and risks for return shipment of equipment are borne by the customer. Following repairs, return shipment costs will be borne by Nextream France. The company may not be held liable for any delay resulting from failure to observe the return procedure. Address B (Brest) Address C (Cergy) Nextream France Technopole Brest-Iroise 295 avenue Alexis de Rochon 29280 PLOUZANE FRANCE Nextream France Service Logistique Clients 17 rue du Petit Albi 95801 CERGY PONTOISE FRANCE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 7 447 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services " " " " For technical inquiries: The technical support service will answer any technical inquiries from customers not covered by a specific support agreement (SLA - Service Level Agreement): by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 72 (from 9am to 6pm, French time, Monday to Friday, excl. business holidays) Answerphone available at all other times. by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92 by e-mail: cssupport.nextream@thomson.net This period can be extended using an SLA. " " " " To contact the Customer Services Department: For information on additional services or a support agreement to meet your requirements, please contact your usual sales representative or the Customer Services Department: by telephone: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 72 by fax: + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 92 by e-mail: csservices.nextream@thomson.net An offer of services will be made depending on your requirements in terms of: Service Level Agreements: TOPAZ, RUBY, EMERALD and DIAMOND levels; In-factory and on-site training; Spares; Technical documentation; Software updates; Local support; Specific agreement. 448 Chapter 7 7.4 - NEXTREAM Customer Services THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 This page can be duplicated for the return. Cette page peut tre copie pour faciliter le retour. Reference number for the RMA: Numro d'autorisation de retour: obtained from the Customer Logistic Service + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82 obtenir auprs du service logistique clients + 33 (0)1 34 20 71 82 cslogistics.nextream@thomson.net Equipt: Name: date: Fault description in the device returned: Merci d'indiquer le dfaut de l'quipement: Ship to (Expdier ): Address B or(ou) Address C : Important notices: Please clearly mark the return authorisation number on the packaging. Except for special agreement, cost and risks for return shipment of the device are borne by the Customer. Nextream France cannot be held responsible if return procedure is not followed. Remarques importantes : Merci de noter clairement le numro d'autorisation de retour sur l'emballage. Le transport pour le retour des quipements est la charge et aux risques du Client. Nextream France ne peut tre tenue pour responsable de tout dlai suite au non- respect de la procdure de retour. RETURN AUTHORISATION FORM AUTORISATION DE RETOUR D'EQUIPEMENT Adresse B (Brest) Adresse C (Cergy) Nextream France Technopole Brest-Iroise 295 Av Alexis de Rochon 29280 PLOUZANE FRANCE Nextream France Service Logistique Clients 17 rue du Petit Albi 95801 Cergy Pontoise FRANCE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 8 - Abbreviations and Acroynms 449
Chapter 8 Abbreviations and Acroynms Abbreviations and acronyms ................................................................... 451 450 Chapter 8
THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 8 451 Abbreviations and acronyms ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS AAL1: ATM Adaptation Layer 1 AAL5: ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AC: Alternating current AC3: Dolby 5+1 Surround encoding A/D: Analogue to Digital ADC: Analogue to Digital Converter AES/EBU: Audio Engineering Society / European Broadcasting Union AMuSE: Audio Multi Standard Encoder API: Application Programming Interface ASI: Asynchronous Serial Interface ASIC: Application Specific Integrated Circuit ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode AVA: Audio and Video Acquisition BAT: Bouquet Association Table BCS: Broadcast Control System BIST: Built In Self Test BPSK: Binary Phase Shift Keying B.W.: Bandwidth CAC: Conditional Access Control CAT: Control Access Table CATV: CAble TeleVision CBR: Constant Bit Rate CDV: Compressed Digital Video CLP: Cell Loss Priority CPCS: Common Point Convergence Sublayer CPU: Central Processing Unit CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check CS: Convergence Sublayer CW: Control Word DBE: Digital Broadcast Encoder dBFS: Full Scale decibel DC: Direct current DDS: Direct Digital Synthesis DES: Data Encryption Standard 452 Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 DID: Data Identifier DPSN: Dcodeur Pal Secam Ntsc (Pal Secam Ntsc decoder) DSNG: Digital SNG DSP: Digital Signal Processor DSS: Digital Satellite System DVB: Digital Video Broacasting DVD: Digital Versatile Disc DVITC: Digital Vertical Interval Time Code ECM: Entitlement Control Message EDH: Error Detection and Handling EEC: European Economic Community EIT: Event Information Table EMC: Electromagnetic compatibility EMM: Entitlement Management Message EPG: Electronic Program Guide EPROM: Erasable Program Only Memory ETSI: European Telecommunications Standards Institute FBI: Field Blanking Interval FCP: Field Coding Parameters FDM: Frequency Domain Multiplexing FEC: Forward Error Correction FPGA: Field Programmable Gate Array GOP: Group Of Pictures GFC: Generic Flow Control GND: Ground GPS: Global Positioning System HDTV: High Definition TeleVision HEC: Header Error Control IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IF: Intermediate Frequency IRD: Integrated Receiver Decoder ISB: Intermediary Satellite Bandwidth ISO/IEC: International Standard Organisation / International Electrical Commis- sion ISOG: International Satellite Operators Group ITU: International Telecommunications Union JTAG: Joint Test Action Group 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 8 453 Abbreviations and acronyms LBI: Line Blanking Interval LCD: Liquid Crystal Display LED: Light Emitting Diode LTW: Legal Time Window LVDS: Low Voltage Differential Signalling MCPC: Multiple Channel Per Carrier MDT: Multiplex Diagnostic Table MMDS: Microwave Multipoint Distribution System MP@ML: Main Profile / Main Level MPEG: Motion Picture Expert Group MPTS: Multiple Program Transport Stream MSB: Most Significant Bit MTBF: Mean Time Between Failures MUX: multiplexer MXX: multiplexer ASIC / DVB / DSS scrambler NIT: Network Identification Table NTSC: National Television System Community OAM: Operation Administration And Maintenance PAL: Phase Alternative Line PAT: Program Association Table PC: Personal Computer PCMCIA: Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCR: Program Clock Reference PDH: Pleisiochronous Digital Hierarchy PES: Packetised Elementary Stream PID: Packet Identifier PL: Physical Layer PLE: Physical Layer Electrical PLL: Phase Locked Loop PLO: Physical Layer Optical PMD: Physical Medium Dependent PMT: Program Map Table P/N: Part number PSI: Program Specific Information PSK: Phase Shift Keying PTI: Payload Type Indicator PTS: Presentation Time Stamp 454 Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 QAM: Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QCIF: Quarter Common Interchange Format QPSK: Quaternary Phase Shift Keying RAM: Random Access Memory R.I.: Revision Index RMS: Root Mean Square RS: Reed Solomon SAM: Scrambling Authorization Module SAR: Segmentation And Reassembly SAV: Start of Active Video SCPC: Single Channel Per Carrier SDH: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SDI: Serial Digital Interface SDT: Service Description Table SECAM: Sequentiel Mmoire SFC: Sampling Frequency Converter SI: Service Information SID: Source Identifier SIF: Source Input Format SIS: Sound In Sync SMPTE: Society of Moving Picture and Television Engineers S/N.: Signal / Noise ratio SNG: Satellite News Gathering SNMP: System and Network Management Protocol SPTS: Single Program Transport Stream SRAM: Static Random Access Memory SSEB: Single Service Encoder Board TBC: Time Base Corrector TBD: To be defined TC: Transmission Convergence TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol TCXO: Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator TDT: Time and Date Table TE: 5.08 mm TOT: Time Offset Table TS: Transport Stream TSDT: Transport Stream Description Table 47232437AK01 THOMSON DBE 4110 June 2003 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual Chapter 8 455 Abbreviations and acronyms U: 44.54 mm UNI: User Network Interface UTC: Universal Time Code UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair VBI: Vertical Blanking Interval VBR: Variable Bit Rate VBV: Video Buffering Verifier VCI: Virtual Channel Identifier VCR: Video Cassette Recorder VITC: Vertical Interval Time Code VPI: Virtual Path Identifier VPS: Video Programming System WSS: Wide Screen Signalling 456 Chapter 8 Abbreviations and acronyms THOMSON DBE 4110 47232437AK01 MPEG-2/DVB Encoder - User manual June 2003 BLANK PAGE